B.Tech Mech 2018R PDF

B.
Tech
CURRICULUM and SYLLABUS-2018
DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Kalasalingam Academy of Research and Education

Under sec.3 of UGC Ac,1956. Accredited by NAAC with ‘A’ Grade
Anand Nagar, Krishnankoil-626126,
Srivilliputtur (via), Virudhunagar (Dt), Tamilnadu, India.
www.kalasalingam.ac.in
KALASALINGAM ACADEMY OF RESEARCH AND EDUCATION
VISION
To be a Center of Excellence of International Repute in Education and Research.
MISSION
To Produce Technically Competent, Socially Committed Technocrats and Administrators
through Quality Education and Research.
DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
VISION
To be Recognized Globally as a Lead in Mechanical Engineering through Excellence in
Education and Innovative Research in Emerging areas
MISSION
To provide quality education and research with the state of the art facilities to the student.
This is accomplished by:
 Enhancing the Knowledge and Expertise through Professional Programmes and Research
Works.
 Endowing the Students with Academic Leadership, Communication Skills and Professional
Awareness towards Social Commitment.
Program Educational Objectives
PEO-1- DIVERSIFIED KNOWLEDGE

Graduates will apply fundamental technical knowledge and skills to find workable solutions to
technological challenges and problems in diversified areas such as Production, Design, Thermal,
Industrial and allied fields of Mechanical Engineering.
PEO-2: CONTEMPORARY ISSUES & SKILLS

Graduates will have an effective communication skills and will recognize the social impacts of
problem solving, decision making and creative skills by understanding contemporary issues.
PEO-3: PROFESSIONAL ATTITUDE

Graduates will gain professional and ethical attitude towards their peers, employers, society and
prove as a responsible leader in the establishments in government and private sectors.
PEO-4: PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPEMENT

Graduates will become entrepreneurs to confront business challenges or will continue their
professional advancement through their knowledge horizon and inculcate lifelong learning.
Program Outcomes (POs):
PO1 - Engineering Knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering

fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering
problems.
PO2 - Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, research literature, and analyse complex
engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of mathematics,
natural sciences, and engineering sciences.
PO3 - Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems

and design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate
consideration for the public health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and environmental
considerations.
PO4 - Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based knowledge and research
methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and synthesis of the
information to provide valid conclusions.
PO5 - Modern Tool Usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and
modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and modelling to complex engineering
activities with an understanding of the limitations.
PO6 - The Engineer and Society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to
assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities
relevant to the professional engineering practice.
PO7 - Environment and Sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional engineering
solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of need for
sustainable development.
PO8 - Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and
norms of the engineering practice.
PO9 - Individual and Team Work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or
leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.
PO10 - Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the

engineering community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write
effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give and receive
clear instructions.
PO11 - Project Management and Finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the
engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member and
leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.
PO12 - Life-long learning: Recognise the need for, and have the preparation and ability to
engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological change.
PSO1- PO 13- An ability to utilize the gained knowledge of mathematics and engineering
sciences to real time problems involving thermal, design, manufacturing and materials domain.
PSO2- PO 14- An ability to specify, fabricate, test, operate, validate and complete
documentation of any basic mechanical systems or processes.
PSO3- PO 15- An ability to apply the acquired software’s skills to design and analysis of
advanced mechanical systems or processes.
DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING (R2018)
S.No Category Credits
I. Basic Sciences and Mathematics 25
Humanities and Social Science 3
II. Soft Skills 3
Humanities Elective 6
III. Basic Engineering 24

Program Core
a)Core Courses 48
IV. b)Community Service Project 3 61
c)Project work 10
Elective Courses
a)Major Elective 18
V.
36
b)Open Elective 18
VI Internship/Industry Training 2
VII Mandatory courses -- ---
Total Credits 160

I. BASIC SCIENCES AND MATHEMATICS
Course
S.No Course Code Course Name L T P C
Type
Introduction to
1. PHY18R171 IC 3 1 2 5
Electromagnetic Theory
2. CHY18R171 Chemistry IC 3 1 2 5
Calculus and Linear
3. MAT18R101 T 3 1 0 4
Algebra
Multiple Integration,
Ordinary Differential
4. MAT18R102 T 3 1 0 4
Equations and Complex
Variable
Partial differential
5. MAT18R203 Equations, Probability and T 3 1 0 4
Statistics
6. BIT18R101 Biology T 3 0 0 3
Total 25
II. HUMANITIES AND SOCIAL SCIENCE
Course Course
S.No Course Name L T P C
Code Type
1. English for technical
HSS18R151 TP 3 0 1 3
communication
2.
Soft skills-I T 3 0 0 1
HSS18R101
3.
Soft skills-II T 3 0 0 1
HSS18R102
4. HSS18R201 Soft skills-III T 3 0 0 1
Total 6
III. BASIC ENGINEERING
S.No Course Code Course

Course Name L T P C
Type
1 EEE18R172 Basic Electrical Engineering IC 3 1 2 5
2 MEC18R151 Engineering graphics & design TP 2 0 2 3
3 MEC18R211 Engineering Mechanics T 3 1 0 4
CSE18R171 Programming for problem IC
4 3 1 2 5
solving
5 MEC18R152 Engineering Practice TP 2 0 2 3
6 ECE18R222 Basic Electronic Engineering T 3 1 0 4
Total 24
IV. PROGRAM CORE
a. Core Courses
Course
Course Code Course Title Pre-requisite L T P C
Type
MEC18R202 Thermodynamics T CHY18R171 3 1 0 4

Fluid Mechanics and
MEC18R272 IC MAT18R101 3 0 2 4
Machinery
MEC18R274 Thermal Engineering IC MEC18R202 3 0 2 4
MEC18R271 Strength of Materials IC MEC18R211 3 0 2 4

PHY18R171
MEC18R208 Materials Science T 3 0 0 3
Instrumentation &
MEC18R210 T - 3 0 0 3
Control
Design of Machine MEC18R271
MEC18R303 T 3 0 0 3
Elements
MEC18R274
MEC18R373 Heat and Mass Transfer IC 3 0 2 4
MEC18R351 Finite Element Analysis TP MEC18R271 2 0 2 3
MEC18R302 Manufacturing Processes T MEC18R152 3 0 0 3

Kinematics & Theory of
MEC18R374 IC MEC18R211 3 0 2 4
Machines
MEC18R375 Metal cutting technology IC MEC18R302 3 0 2 4
Automation in
MEC18R448 T MEC18R302 3 0 0 3
manufacturing
Machine Drawing
MEC18R482 L MEC18R151 1 0 3 2
Practice Laboratory
48
b. Community Service Project
S.
Course Code Course Name Course Type L T P C
No
1. MEC18R399 Community Service Project Project 0 0 3 3
Total 3
c. Main Project work
S.
Course Code Course Name Course Type L T P C
No
1. MEC18R499 Project Work Project 0 0 26 10
Total 10
d. Major Elective
Manufacturing Stream
S. No Course Code Course Name CT Pre-requisite L T P C
Non-Traditional
1. MEC18R311 Machining T MEC18R152 3 0 0 3
Techniques
Theory of Metal
2. MEC18R316 T MEC18R375 3 0 0 3
Cutting
3. MEC18R325 Welding Technology T MEC18R274 3 0 0 3
Recent Trends in
4. MEC18R335 T MEC18R208 3 0 0 3
Welding Techniques
Mechanical
5. MEC18R336 Behaviour of T MEC18R208 3 0 0 3
Materials
Manufacturing system
6. MEC18R337 T - 3 0 0 3
and simulation
Tooling for
7. MEC18R339 T MEC18R152 3 1 0 4
Production
8. MEC18R340 Composite Materials T MEC18R208 3 1 0 4
Heat treatment and

9. MEC18R343 T MEC18R208 3 1 0 4
Surface treating
Non-Destructive
10. MEC18R421 T MEC18R208 3 1 0 4
Examination
Micro
11. MEC18R431 T MEC18R375 3 1 0 4
Manufacturing
IC-Integrated course, TP-Theory with practical, T-Theory
List of Major Electives – Design Stream
Course
S. No Course Name CT Pre-requisite L T P C
Code
1. MEC18R326 Solid Mechanics T MEC18R271 3 1 0 4
2. MEC18R306 Computer Aided Design T MEC18R151 3 0 0 3

Design Of Jigs, Fixtures
3. MEC18R309 T MEC18R151 3 0 0 3
And Press Tools
Design for
4. MEC18R315 T MEC18R152 3 0 0 3
Manufacturing
Principles of
5. MEC18R341 T MEC18R151 3 1 0 4
Component Design
Design of Material
6. MEC18R434 T MEC18R303 3 1 0 4
handling equipments
List of Major Electives – Thermal Stream
Internal Combustion
1. MEC18R312 T MEC18R274 3 0 0 3
Engines
2. MEC18R313 Turbo Machinery T MEC18R202 3 0 0 3
Gas dynamics and Jet

3. MEC18R329 T MEC18R272 3 0 0 3
propulsion
4. MEC18R401 Power plant engineering T MEC18R202 3 0 0 3
5. MEC18R402 Automobile Engineering T MEC18R202 3 0 0 3
List of Major Electives – Industrial Engineering Stream
Course Code Course Name CT Pre-requisite L T P C

S. No
1. MEC18R305 Microprocessors in automation T - 3 0 0 3
Process Planning and Cost

2. MEC18R319 T - 3 0 0 3
Estimation
3. MEC18R324 Plant Layout and Material Handling T - 3 0 0 3
Foundry Mechanization and

4. MEC18R334 T MEC18R152 3 0 0 3
Management
5. MEC18R404 Principles of Management T - 3 0 0 3
6. MEC18R416 Industrial Safety T - 3 0 0 3
7. MEC18R417 Work Study T - 3 0 0 3
8. MEC18R419 Production Planning And Control T MEC18R375 3 0 0 3
9. MEC18R424 Industrial Automation and Robotics T MEC18R374 3 1 0 4
10. MEC18R430 Integrated Manufacturing Systems T MEC18R302 3 1 0 4

Course Code Course Name CT Pre-requisite L T P C
S. No
11. MEC18R438 Tero Technology T - 3 1 0 4
12. MEC18R330 Robotics and Robot Applications T - 3 0 0 3
13. MEC18R304 Mechatronic systems T - 3 0 0 3
14 MEC18R414 Sensors and transducers T EEE18R172 3 1 0 4
OPEN ELECTIVES OFFERED FROM THE DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Course Code Course Name L T P C

MEC18R320 Finite Element Method 3 0 0 3
MEC18R321 Optimization Techniques 3 0 0 3
MEC18R323 Materials Management 3 0 0 3
MEC18R344 Nuclear Power generation 3 0 0 3
MEC18R345 Surface Engineering 3 0 0 3
MEC18R346 Thermodynamics of materials 3 0 0 3
MEC18R347 3D Printing 3 0 0 3
MEC18R348 Maintenance Engineering 3 0 0 3
MEC18R349 Smart Materials 3 0 0 3
MEC18R350 Avionics 3 0 0 3
MEC18R403 Mechatronics 3 0 0 3
MEC18R427 Enterprise Resource Planning 3 0 0 3
MEC18R428 Productivity management and
3 0 0 3
reengineering
MEC18R432 Product life cycle management 3 0 0 3
MEC18R440 Basic Machining 3 0 0 3
MEC18R441 Supply chain management 3 0 0 3
MEC18R442 Basics in Heat transfer 3 0 0 3
MEC18R443 Automatic Guided Vehicle 3 0 0 3
MEC18R445 Applied thermodynamics 3 0 0 3
MEC18R446 Industrial Psychology 3 0 0 3
MEC18R447 Process equipment and design 3 0 0 3
c. List of Humanities Electives
HSS18R001 Management Concepts and Techniques 3 0 0 3

HSS18R002 Marketing Management 3 0 0 3
HSS18R003 Organizational Psychology 3 0 0 3
HSS18R004 Project Management 3 0 0 3
HSS18R005 Stress Management and Coping Strategies 3 0 0 3
HSS18R006 Economics for Engineers 3 0 0 3
HSS18R007 Human Resource Management and Labour Law 3 0 0 3
HSS18R008 Entrepreneurship Development 3 0 0 3
HSS18R009 Cost Analysis and Control 3 0 0 3
HSS18R010 Product Design and Development 3 0 0 3
HSS18R011 Business Process Reengineering 3 0 0 3
HSS18R012 Political Economy 3 0 0 3
HSS18R013 Professional Ethics 3 0 0 3
HSS18R014 Operations Research 3 0 0 3
HSS18R015 Total Quality Management 3 0 0 3
HSS18R016 Advanced Soft skills 3 0 0 3
d) Honors Electives
1. MEC18R310 CNC Machining T MEC18R375 3 0 0 3
Modern
2. MEC18R322 Manufacturing T MEC18R375 3 0 0 3
Processes
Gear manufacturing
3. MEC18R338 T MEC18R152 3 0 0 3
and inspection
Micro Electro
4. MEC18R412 T EEE18R172 3 1 0 4
Mechanical Systems
Product Design and

5. MEC18R429 T MEC18R303 3 1 0 4
Development
Design of
6. MEC18R307 T MEC18R271 3 0 0 3
transmission systems
7. MEC18R317 Tribology T MEC18R211 3 0 0 3
Vibration Analysis
8. MEC18R331 T - 3 0 0 3
and Noise Monitoring
Design and analysis of
9. MEC18R426 T MEC18R151 3 1 0 4
experiments
Refrigeration and Air
10. MEC18R318 T MEC18R274 3 0 0 3
conditioning
Design of Heat
11. MEC18R333 T MEC18R274 3 1 0 4
Transfer Equipments
Computational Fluid
12. MEC18R342 Dynamics and Heat T MEC18R274 3 1 0 4
Transfer
Energy conservation
13. MEC18R405 T MEC18R274 3 0 0 3
and management
Design for cellular
14. manufacturing T MEC18R302 3 1 0 4
MEC18R435
systems
Design for
15. MEC18R437 T - 3 1 0 4
ergonomics
MEC18R397 INTERNSHIP / INDUSTRY TRAINING - - - 2
MEC18R398 MANDATORY COURSES - - - -

B. Tech. Mechanical Engineering – Regulation 2018
School of Automotive and Mechanical Engineering
PHY18R171 : INTRODUCTION TO L T P C
ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY 3 1 2 5
Course Category: Basic Science and Mathematics
Pre-requisite: Nil
Course Type : Integrated Course
Course Objective(s):
To Understand the basic knowledge about the Electrostatics, Magnetostatics, Materials about magnetic
and dielectric, Faraday laws and concepts, Maxwell’s equation and Electromagnetic waves.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Describe the properties of static charges
CO2 Understand the basic concepts of magnetic field effects
CO3 Understand the fundamentals of magnetic properties of materials
CO4 Explore the basic idea about electromagnetic induction
CO5 Apply the knowledge on electromagnetism in solving real world problems
Mapping of Course Outcome(s):

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 3
CO2 3 3
CO3 3 3
CO4 3 3
CO5 3 3 2 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I: ELECTROSTATICS
The Electric Field- Continuous Charge Distributions-Divergence and Curl of electrostatic field: Field lines, Flux
and Gauss's law, Divergence of E-Application of Gauss's law-The Curl of E-Electric Potential: Poisson's equation
and Laplace equation, The potentials of a Localized Charge Distribution, Boundary Conditions-Work and Energy
in electrostatics: Energy of a point charge distribution and energy of continuous charge distribution. Electric field
and potential due to electric dipole
Unit-II: MAGNETOSTATICS
The Lorentz Force Law-Biot-Savart’s Law- Applications of Biot-Savart’s Law- Magnetic field due to current in
a straight conductor-Magnetic field due to a circular current loop- Divergence and curl of static magnetic field -
Ampere’s Circuital law- Integral and differential form of Ampere’s law- Applications of Ampere’s law: Magnetic
field due to solenoid and Magnetic field due to Toroid-Magnetic vector potential
Unit-III: MAGNETIC AND DIELECTRIC MATERIALS

Properties of magnetic materials, Diamagnetism, Paramagnetism and Ferromagnetism- Ferromagnetic Domains-
Hysteresis curve- Comparison of Dia, Para, and Ferro magnetism. Dielectric constant – electronic, ionic,
orientational and space charge polarization – frequency and temperature dependence of polarization – internal
field – Claussius Mosotti equation – dielectric breakdown mechanisms.
Unit-IV: FARADAY'S LAW, DISPLACEMENT CURRENT AND MAXWELL’S

EQUATIONS
Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic induction-Lenz’s law-Inductance- Electromotive force- motional EMF - Self-
inductance of single coil-Mutual inductance of two coils-Energy stored in magnetic field - displacement current -
physical interpretation - Maxwell's equation in free space, Maxwell’s equation in linear isotropic media.
Unit-V: ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES

Poynting Theorem - Waves in one Dimension (Sinusoidal wave), Polarization-Electromagnetic waves in vacuum-
Monochromatic plane waves-Energy and momentum in electromagnetic waves-Electromagnetic waves in matter.
Application of electromagnetic waves: Reflection and Refraction at Dielectric interface (Normal Incidence only).
List of Experiments:
1. To compare capacitances using De’Sauty’s bridge.
2. To determine the self-inductance of the coil using Anderson’s bridge.
3. To determine the specific resistance of the material of two given wires using a meter bridge
4. To determine the internal resistance of a primary cell using a potentiometer
5. Measurement of field strength B and its variation in a Solenoid (Determine dB/dx).
6. To study the series LCR circuit and determine its (a) Resonant Frequency, (b)Quality Factor
7. To study the parallel LCR circuit and determine its (a) Anti-resonant frequency and(b) Quality factor Q
8. To determine the Low Resistance by Carey Foster’s Bridge
9. Determination of Thermo emf- direct method – BG
10. To determine the volume magnetic susceptibility of Manganese sulphate solution at different
concentrations.
11. Determination of dielectric constant of liquids.
12. To determine the mutual inductance of the coil using Anderson’s bridge.
Text Book(s):
1. J. David Griffiths, “Introduction to Electrodynamics”, Edition: 4, Pearson India , 2015.
2. Sathya Prakash, “Electricity and Magnetism”, Edition: 31, Pragati Prakashan India , 2016.
Reference(s):
1. Shobhit Mahajan and S. Rai Choudhary, “Electricity, Magnetism and Electromagnetic Theory”,
Edition: 1, McGraw Hill India , 2012.
2. M. Edward Purcell, “Electricity and Magnetism”, Edition: 2, McGraw Hill India , 2011.
3. Indu Prakash, Ram Krishna and A.K. Jha, “A Text Book of Practical Physics (Engineering Students)”,
Edition: 11, Kitab Mahal India , 2011.
L T P C
CHY18R171 : CHEMISTRY
3 1 2 5
Pre-requisite: Nil
Introducing the fundamental concepts and applications of Chemistry to the engineering students to
understand, analyse and apply the same to complex technical issues
Course Outcome(s):
Demonstrate a knowledge on the significance and role of water quality parameters in the
CO1
domestic and engineering applications and analysing the same through modern methods
CO2 Explain the principles of thermodynamics for solving engineering problems
Explain the basic concepts of electrochemistry, batteries, corrosion and to apply the same
CO3
for the betterment of society
Explain about synthesis, characteristics and applications of technologically important
CO4
polymers, composites and nanomaterials
CO5 Explain the underlying principles, instrumentation and applications of analytical techniques

CO1 3 3
CO2 3 3
CO3 3 3
CO4 3 3
CO5 3 3
Course Topics:
Unit-I: ATOMIC AND MOLECULAR STRUCTURE
Schrodinger wave equation: Derivation of time independent Schrodinger wave equation, Representation of
Schrodinger wave equation in polar coordinates - Radial distribution function graphs of s, p, d and f orbitals.
Molecular Orbital Theory: MOT concept, MO diagrams of homo-nuclear diatomic molecules (hydrogen, nitrogen
and oxygen) and hetero-nuclear diatomic molecules (carbon monoxide and nitric oxide). Crystal field theory: CFT
concept, weak and strong ligands, energy level diagrams of transition metal ions (Fe2+& Fe3+) in octahedral and
tetrahedral complexes and their magnetic properties. Intermolecular forces - Ionic, dipolar and van der Waals
interactions.
Unit-II: PERIODIC PROPERTIES

Effective nuclear charge - Factors affecting effective nuclear charge: Penetration or shielding of orbitals -
Variation of s, p, d and f orbital energies of atoms in the periodic table - Aufbau principle (Building-up principle):
Application of Aufbau principle in writing electronic configuration, Deviation from Aufbau principle - Periodicity
of properties in a periodic table - Periodic properties: Atomic and ionic sizes, ionization energies, electron affinity
and electronegativity - Variation of periodic properties in the periodic table - Hard soft acids and bases: Concept
and examples
Unit-III: FREE ENERGY AND CHEMICAL EQUILIBRIA

Thermodynamic functions: Definition and mathematical expression for Work, Energy, Enthalpy, Entropy and
Free energy - Nernst equation: Derivation, apply Nernst equation to determine of solubility product, pH (glass
electrode). Potentiometric titrations: Acid-Base, Redox and precipitation reaction - Water analysis: Hardness by
EDTA method and chloride ion by Argentomentric method - Corrosion: Definition, types (dry & wet) and
mechanism. and control of Dry and Wet corrosion.
Unit-IV: ORGANIC REACTIONS

Nucleophilic substitution reactions: Definition, types and examples of nucleophile, Compare nucleophilicity and
basicity of a nuceophile - Types of nucleophilic substitution (case RX and ArX): Mechanism of SN1, SN2, SNi
and Benzyne. Electrophilic substitution reactions: Definition, types and examples of electrophile - Electrophilic
substitution reactions of hydrocarbons: Halogenation, sulphonation, nitration. Friedel crafts alkylation and
acylation reaction. Nucleophilic addition reactions (case aldehydes and ketones): Polarity of C=O bond. General
mechanism of nucleophilic addition reactions on aldehydes and ketones: HCN, HOH, ROH and NaHSO3
addition. Electrophilic addition reactions (case alkenes): General mechanism of electrophilic addition reactions
on alkene - Addition of HBr [Markownikoff & Anti-Markownikoff (peroxide effect)] - Addition of alkene
(polymerization of ethylene). Elimination reactions: Types of elimination reactions (case alkyl halides):
Dehydrohalogenation of alkyl halides - E1 and E2 mechanism - Dehydration of alcohols to alkene and ethers.
Greener synthesis of drug molecules (Aspirin and Ibuprofen)
Unit-V: STEREOCHEMISTRY AND SPECTROSCOPIC TECHNIQUES

Stereochemistry - Definition with examples: Geometrical isomers (alkene) and stereoisomers, symmetry,
chirality, enantiomers, diastereomers, meso and racemic mixture. Representation of 3D structures: Wedge
formula, Fischer projections, Newmann and Sawhorse formula (up to 2 carbons) - Conformational analysis:
Ethane, butane and cyclohexane - Configurational analysis: Rules of RS nomenclature and application of RS
nomenclature to molecules containing one chiral centre. Electronic spectroscopy: Principle, instrumentation,
selection rules and medicinal application of fluorescence spectroscopy. Nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy
(1H-NMR): Principle, instrumentation, chemical shift, coupling constant and application (structural identification
of the compound C3H6O from 1H-NMR data). X-ray diffraction: Principle, instrumentation and applications X-
ray diffraction.
1. Determination of Viscosity by Ostwald Viscometer
2. Determination of surface tension by stalagmometer.
3. Adsorption of acetic acid by charcoal.
4. Determination of chloride content of water.
5. Estimation of hardness of water by EDTA method.
6. Determination of the rate constant of a reaction
7. Thin layer chromatography.
8. Determination of the partition coefficient of a substance between two immiscible liquids
9. Determination of Saponification /acid value of oil.
10. Preparation of Aspirin
11. Potentiometric titration of strong acid vs strong base.
12. Potentiometric titration of weak acid vs strong base.
13. Determination of cell constant and conductance of solutions.
Text Book(s):
1. L. Ernest Eliel, H. Samuel Wilen, N. Lewis Mander, “Stereochemistry of Organic Compounds”,
Edition: 1, Wiley India , 2017.
2. M. Bruce Mahan and J. Rollie Meyers, “University Chemistry”, Edition: 11, Pearson India , 2017.
Reference(s):
1. Colin Banwell and Elaine McCash, “Fundamentals of Molecular Spectroscopy”, Edition: 4, McGraw
Hill India , 2016.
2. Peter Atkins, Julio de Paula, “Atkins’ Physical Chemistry”, Edition: 10, Oxford University Press India
, 2014.
3. R.D. Madan and Satya Prakash, “Modern Inorganic Chemistry”, Edition: 4, S. Chand Publishing India
, 2009.
L T P C
MAT18R101 : CALCULUS AND LINEAR ALGEBRA
3 1 0 4
Pre-requisite: Nil
Course Type : Theory
To enable the students to acquire knowledge and skills in basic components of calculus, to handle the
situations involving multivariable calculus, and to diagonalize a symmetric matrix using eigenvalues
and eigenvectors.
Course Outcome(s):
Know the fundamental theorems such as Rolle’s theorem, Mean value theorem, Taylor’s
CO1
theorem and its applications.
Understand the basic concepts of limit, continuity, derivative, partial derivative and total
CO2
derivative and its applications.
CO3 Solve the real world problems using differentiation and integration.
Understand the concepts of sequence, convergent of sequences, series and testing of
CO4
convergent of series using different methods.
Find the solution of simultaneous linear equations using matrices and to find the eigen
CO5 values and eigen vectors of a matrix, Cayley-Hamilon theorem and orthogonal
transformations.

CO1 3 3
CO2 3 3
CO3 3 3
CO4 3 3
CO5 3 3
Course Topics:
Unit-I: CALCULUS
Rolle’s Theorem- Mean value theorems - Taylor’s and Maclaurin theorems with remainders - indeterminate forms
and L'Hospital's rule - Maxima and minima.
Unit-II: MULTIVARIABLE CALCULUS (DIFFERENTIATION)

Limit, continuity and partial derivatives - directional derivatives - total derivative - Maxima, minima and saddle
points - Method of Lagrange multipliers.
Unit-III: CALCULUS
Curvature (Cartesian coordinates) - Evolutes and involutes; Evaluation of definite and improper integrals; Beta
and Gamma functions and their properties; Applications of definite integrals to evaluate surface areas and volumes
of revolutions.
Unit-IV: SEQUENCES AND SERIES

Convergence of sequence and series, tests for convergence; Power series, Taylor's series, series for exponential,
trigonometric and logarithm functions
Unit-V: MATRICES
System of linear equations; Symmetric, skew-symmetric and orthogonal matrices; Determinants; Eigenvalues
and eigenvectors; Cayley-Hamilton Theorem - Diagonalization of matrices - Orthogonal transformation-
Reduction of Quadratic form to Canonical form.
Text Book(s):
1. B.S.Grewal, J.S.Grewal, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Edition: 43, Khanna Publishers , 2017.
2. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Edition: 10, Wiley India , 2001.
Reference(s):
1. Bandaru Venkata Ramana, “Engineering Mathematics”, Edition: 1, McGraw Hill India , 2006.
2. T.Veerarajan, “Engineering Mathematics”, Edition: 1, McGraw Hill India , 2008.
MAT18R102 : MULTIPLE INTEGRATION, ORDINARY L T P C

DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND COMPLEX
3 1 0 4
VARIABLE
Pre-requisite: Nil
To enable the students to understand the concepts of multiple integrations, their applications, and to
handle analytic functions on complex plane and perform complex integration.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Understand the concepts of double and triple integral and its applications.
CO2 Know about the applications of double and triple integral in vector calculus.
CO3 Know the methods of solving differential equations of first and second orders.
Understand the concepts of analytic functions, conformal mappings and bilinear
CO4
transformations.
Understand the concepts of singularity, residues and evaluation of certain improper
CO5
integrals.

CO1 3 3
CO2 3 3
CO3 3 3
CO4 3 3
CO5 3 3
Course Topics:
Unit-I: MULTIVARIABLE CALCULUS (INTEGRATION)
Multiple Integration: Double integrals (Cartesian), change of order of integration in double integrals, change of
variables (Cartesian to polar), Applications: areas and volume; Triple integrals (Cartesian), orthogonal curvilinear
coordinates, Simple applications involving cubes, sphere and rectangular parallelepipeds
Unit-II: INTEGRAL THEOREMS

Gradient, curl and divergence. Scalar line integrals, vector line integrals, scalar surface integrals, vector surface
integrals, Theorems of Green, Gauss and Stokes.
Unit-III: ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS

Exact, linear and Bernoulli’s equations, Euler’s equations, Equations not of first degree: equations solvable for
p, equations solvable for y, equations solvable for x and Clairaut’s type. Second order linear differential equations
with variable coefficients, method of variation of parameters, Cauchy-Euler equations.
Unit-IV: COMPLEX VARIABLE – DIFFERENTIATION

Differentiation, Cauchy-Riemann equations, analytic functions, harmonic functions; elementary analytic
functions (exponential, trigonometric, logarithm) and their properties; Conformal mappings, Mobius
transformations and their properties.
Unit-V: COMPLEX VARIABLE – INTEGRATION

Contour integrals, Cauchy Integral formula (without proof); Taylor’s series, zeros of analytic functions,
singularities, Laurent’s series; Residues, Cauchy Residue theorem (without proof), Evaluation of definite integral
involving sine and cosine, Evaluation of certain improper integrals (Integration around small semicircles and
rectangular contours)
Text Book(s):
1. B.S.Grewal, J.S Grewal., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Edition: 43, Khanna Publishers India ,
2017.
2. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Edition: 10, Wiley India , 2001.
Reference(s):
1. Bandaru Venkata Ramana, “Engineering Mathematics”, Edition: 1, McGraw Hill India , 2006.
2. T.Veerarajan, “Engineering Mathematics”, Edition: 1, Tata McGraw-Hill , 2008.
MAT18R203 : PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS, L T P C

PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS 3 1 0 4
Pre-requisite: Nil
To enable the students to solve the partial differential equations and to apply them, to understand the
concepts of probability and statistics, and to solve real world problems using statistical methods.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Know the method of solving first and second order partial differential equations.
Classify the second order partial differential equations and to know about solving of initial
CO2
and boundary value problems.
Understand the concepts of probability, random variable, probability density functions,
CO3
probability mass function, cumulative distributions and expectation.
Know about standard distributions such as binomial, poisson and normal distributions and
CO4
their applications.
Evaluate moments, skewness and kurtosis for standard distributions and know about
CO5
correlation and regressions.

CO1 3 3
CO2 3 3
CO3 3 3
CO4 3 3
CO5 3 3
Course Topics:
Unit-I: PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
First order partial differential equations, solutions of first order linear and non-linear PDEs. Solution to
homogenous and non-homogenous linear partial differential equations second and higher order by complimentary
function and particular integral method.
Unit-II: APPLICATIONS OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS

Flows, vibrations and diffusions, second-order linear equations and their classification, Initial and boundary
conditions, solution of the wave equation and diffusion equation by the method of separation of variables, The
Laplacian in plane, cylindrical and spherical polar coordinates and solutions.
Unit-III: BASIC PROBABILITY AND RANDOM VARIABLES

Axiomatic definition of Probability - Conditional probability – Independent events - Total probability – Bayes
theorem - Random variables – Discrete random variable - Probability mass function – Continuous random
variable - Probability density functions – Cumulative distribution function- Properties- Expectation.
Unit-IV: STANDARD DISTRIBUTIONS AND BIVARIATE DISTRIBUTIONS

Binomial, Poisson, Uniform, Exponential and Normal distributions and their properties. Two dimensional
random variables – Joint probability density function – Cumulative distribution function – Marginal density
function
Unit-V: STATISTICS
Moments, skewness and Kurtosis - evaluation of statistical parameters for Binomial, Poisson and Normal
distributions, Correlation and regression – Rank correlation- Curve fitting by the method of least squares- fitting
of straight lines and second degree parabolas.
Text Book(s):
1. T.Veerarajan, “Engineering Mathematics”, Edition: 1, Tata McGraw-Hill , 2010.
2. T.Veerarajan, “Probability,Statistics and Random process”, Edition: 1, McGraw-Hill Education ,
2016.
Reference(s):
1. Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Edition: 10, John Wiley and Sons , 2001.
2. B.S.Grewal, J.S.Grewal, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Edition: 37, Khanna Publish , 2004.
L T P C
BIT18R101 : BIOLOGY FOR ENGINEERS
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
Any engineer, irrespective of the parent discipline (mechanical, electrical, civil, chemical,
metallurgical, etc.,) has a high probability of using the disciplinary skills toward designing/improving
biological systems in the future. This course is designed to convey the essentials of cell and molecular
biology to provide a frame-work for more specific understanding, and contribution by any engineer.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Describe the fundamentals of cell structure and cell cycle
CO2 Understand the classification and functions of biomolecules
CO3 Elaborate the basic cellular mechanisms such as replication, transcription and translation
CO4 Describe the underlying concepts of infection and immunity
CO5 Explain various applications of biology

CO1 2 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 3 2
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 3 2 3 3
CO5 3 2 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I: INTRODUCTION
Fundamental difference between science and engineering- comparison between eye and camera, Bird flying and
aircraft; major discoveries in biology- ; Classification based on: Cellularity- Unicellular and Multicellular; Ultra
structure - prokaryotes and eukaryotes; three major kingdoms of life; Cell structure, intracellular organelles and
their functions, comparison of plant and animal cells- Overview of Cell cycle and cell division
Unit-II: BIOMOLECULES
Chemistry of biomolecules: Carbohydrates, Lipids, Proteins; classification of amino acids; classification of
proteins based on structure and functions; Nucleic acids -types, structure and function of DNA and RNA
Unit-III: GENES TO PROTEINS

Gene, Genome and chromosome; Central dogma of molecular biology; Classical experiments of DNA: Griffith
and, Avery, McCarty and MacLeod, Meselson and Stahl - DNA replication, Transcription and Translation
Unit-IV: MICROBIOLOGY
Microscopy; Microbes as infectious agents - malaria, tuberculosis, typhoid, polio, dengue, AIDS;; cultivation of
bacteria. Immunity - innate and acquired immunity - organs and cells of the immune system - classification of
antibodies - types of T cells - transplantation, autoimmunity overview
Unit-V: APPLICATIONS OF BIOLOGY

Healthcare-antibiotics, vaccines, monoclonal antibodies, insulin and interferons; Beneficial bacteria - probiotic
bacteria, nitrogen fixing bacteria, fermentation and fermented foods and products Environmental - waste water
treatment, bioremediation; Biomaterials and biopolymers for medical and environmental applications; Biosensors
Text Book(s):
1. E.D.P.De Robertis, and E.M.F.De Robertis, “- Cell and Molecular Biology”, Edition: 8 , Williams &
Wilkins- Philadelphia , 2010.
2. D.Voet, G.Voet, “Biochemistry”, Edition: 3, John Wiley and Sons , 2001.
Reference(s):
1. M.J.Pelczar, ECS Chan and NR Krieg, “Microbiology”, Edition: 7, Tata McGraw Hill , 2010.
2. D.Friefelder, “Molecular Biology”, Edition: 5, McGraw-Hill Companies , 2013.
L T P C
HSS18R151 ENGLISH FOR TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION
2 0 2 3
Pre-requisite: Basic English Knowledge at Course Category: Humanities and Social Sciences
School Level Course Type: Theory with Practical
To help the learner develop listening skills by providing them with inspiring material
To help the learner acquire the ability to speak comfortably in real-life situations
To inculcate in students a taste for English so that they take to reading novels, dailies, and motivational
books and dailies
To help learners passionately improve their vocabulary
To enable students to write all kinds of letters, job applications, and reports
To help learners sit for the BEC Examinations
Course Outcome(s):
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
CO1: Speak good English covering their day to day activities
CO2: Analyse the importance of Listening to communicate well
CO3: Make Situational Dialogues on emerging multiple situations
CO4: Read aloud Newspapers and other Texts
CO5: Compose effective error free composition
CO / PO PSO
PO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 2 3 2
CO2 2 3 1
CO3 1 3 2
CO4 2 3 3
CO5 2 3 3
Course Topics:
1 UNIT I – VOCABULARY BUILDING
1.1 The concept of word formation
1.2 Root words from foreign languages and their use in English
1.3 Prefixes and suffixes; word derivatives using them
1.4 Synonyms, Antonyms and standard Abbreviations
2 UNIT II – BASIC WRITING SKILLS
2.1 Sentence structures
2.2 Use of phrases and clauses in sentences
2.3 Creating Coherence
2.4 Techniques for Writing Precisely
3 UNIT III – IDENTIFYING COMMON ERRORS IN WRITING
3.1 Tenses
3.2 Subject – verb agreement
3.3 Noun –Pronoun Agreement
3.4 Verbs – Transitive, Intransitive
3.5 Misplaced Modifiers
3.6 Articles
3.7 Prepositions
3.8 Redundancies and Clichés
3.9 Direct, Indirect speech
3.10 Infinitives, Gerunds
3.11 Comparison of adjectives
4 UNIT IV NATURE AND STYLE OF SENSIBLE WRITING
4.1 Describing
4.2 Defining
4.3 Classifying
4.4 Providing examples or evidence
4.5 Writing introduction or conclusion
5 UNIT V WRITING PRACTICES
5.1 Comprehension
5.2 Precis writing
5.3 Essay writing
5.4 Letter writing
5.5 Instructions
5.6 Paragraph development
6 UNIT VI – ORAL COMMUNICATION
6.1 Listening comprehension
6.2 Pronunciation, intonation, stress and rhythm
6.3 Common everyday situations: Conversations and dialogues
6.4 Interviews
6.5 Formal presentations
L T P C
HSS18R101 SOFT SKILL - I
1 0 0 1
Course Category: Humanities and Social Sciences Course Type: Theory
Course Outcomes:
 Learners would have developed the skills of reading and comprehension by mastering the basic
linguistic skills
 Learners would have acquired an understanding of the methods of reading and interpretation
Course Outcomes Mapping:

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 3 3 3 1
CO2 3 2 3 3 3 1
Course Topics:
S. Course Module Name Topics # hours
1 Parts of Speech
Foundation
2 Articles
2
3 Nouns
Delightful Descriptions
4 Adjectives
5 Verbs
Double Actions
6 Adverbs
2
7 Prepositions
Remedial Meaningful Links
8 Conjunctions
English
9 Past Tense
10 Yesterday Today Present Tense
2
11 Tomorrow Future Tense
12 Special Cases
13 Matching Blocks Subject Verb agreement
14 Modals 2
Questions and Expressions
15 Question Tags
16 Concise Cogent Communication 2
Professional
17 Active Listening 2
Communication
18 Business English Interact Interpret Respond 2
JAM and Extempore-JAM and
19 Expositions and discussions Extempore- BIKER B {Extempore}- 2
Six Thinking Hats- JAM
20 Finding Errors Phrase substitution 2
21 Grammar and Vocabulary Vocabulary 2
22 Verbal Idioms and Phrases; Collocations 2
23 Fill in the blanks Sentence Completion 2
Blanks and Jumbles
24 Para jumbles/Jumbled Sentences 2
S. Course Module Name Topics # hours
25 Cloze Passage; Theme Detection 2
Reading Comprehension
26 Reading Comprehension 2
L T P C
HSS18R102 SOFT SKILL - II
1 0 0 1
Course Outcomes:
 Will be able to critically evaluate various real-life situations by resorting to Analysis
 of key issues and factors.
 Will be able to read between the lines and understand various language structures
 Will be able to demonstrate various principles involved in solving mathematical problems and
thereby reducing the time taken for performing job functions.

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 3 3 3 1
CO2 3 2 3 3 3 1
CO3 3 2 3 3 3 1
Course Topics:
S. Course Module Description of learning Imparted # of hours
1 Quantitative Number Theory- Real numbers, 2
Divisibility, HCF and LCM, Remainder
theorem, last digit, factorials, recurring
decimals
2 Quantitative Percentages, Profit & Loss, Discount 2
3 Quantitative Ratio, Proportion, Allegation, Mixture, 2
Partnership
4 Quantitative Time, Speed, Distance, Trains, Boats 2
and streams
5 Aptitude Quantitative Age Problem, Word Problem, Averages 2
Training
6 Quantitative Time & Work, pipes and cisterns 2
7 Quantitative Mensuration 2D, Mensuration 3D, 2
Interest calculations
8 Quantitative Algebra, Clocks & Calendar 2
9 Quantitative Probability, Permutation & Combination 2
10 Reasoning Blood relations, Figure series 2
11 Reasoning Series completion, cubes 2
12 Reasoning Coding decoding, Alphabet test 2
13 Reasoning Puzzles, Analogies 2
14 Reasoning Syllogisms, Directions 2
L T P C
HSS18R201 SOFT SKILL - III
1 0 0 1
Course Outcomes:
 Learners would have developed the skills of reading and comprehension by mastering the basic
linguistic skills
 Learners would have acquired an understanding of the methods of reading and interpretation

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 3 3 3 1
CO2 3 2 3 3 3 1
Course Topics:
L T P C
EEE18R172 : BASIC ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
3 1 2 5
Course Category: Basic Engineering
Pre-requisite: Nil
To focus the fundamental ideas of the Electrical Engineering by providing wide exposure to the basic
concepts of Electrical Engineering such as DC Circuits, AC Circuits, electrical machines, measuring
instruments and electrical installations etc.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 To Apply basic laws of electricity in DC Circuits
CO2 To Apply basic laws of electricity in AC Circuits
CO3 To study the working principles of dc Machines and Transformers
CO4 To study and working principle of AC Machines
CO5 To study the basic components of Low Voltage Electrical Installations

CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 3 1
CO3 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 3
Course Topics:
Unit-I: DC CIRCUITS
Electrical circuit elements (R, L and C), voltage and current sources, Series and Parallel circuits. Kirchhoff
current and voltage laws, analysis of simple dc circuits-Mesh and Nodal methods. Superposition, Thevenin and
Norton Theorems. Time-domain analysis of I order RL and RC circuits
Unit-II: AC CIRCUITS
Representation of sinusoidal waveforms, RMS and Average values - form and peak factors, phasor
representation, real power, reactive power, apparent power, power factor, Analysis of single-phase ac circuits
consisting of R, L, C, RL, RC, RLC combinations (series and parallel), resonance. Three-phase balanced
circuits, voltage and current relations in star and delta connections.
Unit-III: DC MACHINES AND TRANSFORMERS

Construction and working principle of DC Generator and DC Motor and its emf equations- related problems.
Transformer – construction, working and types- ideal and practical transformer, equivalent circuit, losses in
transformers, regulation and efficiency.
Unit-IV: AC MACHINES
Constructional details - Principle of operation - Torque-slip characteristics - Starting torque - Relation between
torque and slip - Losses and efficiency. Types of single phase induction motor- construction and working of
alternators
Unit-V: ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

Components of LT Switchgear: Switch Fuse Unit (SFU), MCB, ELCB, MCCB, Types of Wires and Cables,
Earthing. Types of Batteries, Important Characteristics for Batteries. Elementary calculations for energy
consumption, power factor improvement and battery Backup.
1. Verification of Kirchhoff’s Laws
2. Verification of AC voltage measurements
3. Measuring the steady-state and transient time-response of R-L, R-C, and R-L-C Circuits.
4. Demonstration of DC Motor
5. Demonstration of Transformer
6. Load test on three-phase transformer
7. Open circuit and short circuit tests on single phase transformer
8. Torque Speed Characteristic of separately excited dc motor.
9. Demonstration of Induction Motor
10. Load test on three-phase squirrel cage induction motor.
11. Study basic electrical installation components for LT switchgear
Text Book(s):
1. V.K. Mehta, “Principles of Electrical Engineering and Electronics”, Edition: 1, S. Chand & Company
Ltd , 2012.
2. D.P Kothari and I.J Nagrath, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Edition: 1, McGraw Hill , 2009.
Reference(s):
1. T. Thyagarajan, “Fundamentals of Electrical and Electronics Engineering”, Edition: 3, SciTech
Publications India , 2015.
2. K.A Muraleedharan, R. Muthususbramanian and S. Salivahanan , “Basic Electrical, Electronics and
Computer Engineering”, Edition: 1, McGraw Hill India , 2006.
3. G.K Mithal, “Electronic Devices & Circuits”, Edition: 1, Khanna Publications , 1997.
L T P C
MEC18R151 : ENGINEERING GRAPHICS & DESIGN
2 0 2 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
Course Type : Theory with practical
This course aims to introduce the concept of graphic communication, develop the drawing skills for
communicating concepts, ideas and designs of engineering products, Demonstrate skills in
interpreting, and producing engineering drawings accurately and to give exposure to national
standards relating to engineering drawing
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Create the projection of points in all quadrants and straight lines
CO2 Construct the projections of planes and solid objects with refer to reference planes
CO3 Illustrate the true shape of truncated solids in both the manual and computerized manner
CO4 Develop surfaces of truncated solids in both the manual and computerized man
CO5 Apply orthographic and isometric projections in both the manual and computerized man

CO1 2 2 1 1
CO2 3 1 1 1
CO3 2 3 3 3 2 3 2 3
CO4 1 2 3 3 3 3 2 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
Course Topics:
Unit-I: PROJECTION OF POINTS AND STRAIGHT LINES
Importance of graphics – use of drafting instruments – BIS conventions and specifications – size, layout and
folding of drawing sheets – lettering dimensioning and scales - Projection of points, located in all quadrants -
projection of straight lines located in the first quadrant, determination of true lengths and true inclinations
Unit-II: PROJECTION OF PLANES AND SOLIDS

Projection of polygonal surface and circular lamina located in first quadrant inclined to one or both reference
planes-Projection of solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone when the axis is inclined to one reference
plane by change of position method
Unit-III: SECTION OF SOLIDS

Section of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone in vertical position by cutting planes inclined
to any one of the reference planes, obtaining true shape of section
Unit-IV: DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACES

Development of lateral surfaces of simple and truncated solids – prisms, pyramids, cylinders and cones
Unit-V: ORTHOGRAPHIC AND ISOMETRIC PROJECTION

Orthographic principles – missing view - free hand sketching in first angle projection from pictorial views.
Principles of isometric projection – isometric view and projections of simple solids, truncated prisms, pyramids,
cylinders and cones. Introduction to CAD software – menus and tools – drafting platform demonstration
Practical Modules:
1. Construction of conic sections using CAD software
2. Construction of simple planes using exclusive commands like extend, trim etc.,
3. Construction of 3D model – solids and sectional views
4. Generating 2D orthographic blue prints from 3D part models
5. Vectorization of simple building plan and elevation
Text Book(s):
1. Basant Aggarwal and C. Aggarwal, “Engineering Drawing”, Edition: 2, Tata McGraw-Hill Education
, 2013.
2. N.S. Parthasarathy, Vela Murali, “Engineering Drawing”, Edition: 1, OUP India , 2015.
Reference(s):
1. M.B. Shah and B.C. Rana, “Engineering Drawing”, Edition: 2, Pearson , 2009.
2. K.V. Natarajan,, “A Text Book of Engineering Graphics”, Edition: 21, Dhanalakshmi Publishers ,
2012.
3. Paul Richard, Jim Fitzgerald, “Introduction to AutoCAD 2017: A Modern Perspective”, Edition: 1,
Pearson Education , 2016.
L T P C
MEC18R211 : ENGINEERING MECHANICS
3 1 0 4
Pre-requisite: Nil
The course uses the Laws of Mechanics to predict forces in and motions of machines and structures.
The course is the key prerequisite course to sequences of courses dealing with mechanics of
machines, stress analysis and design of mechanical systems.
Course Outcome(s):
Explain the vectorial and scalar representation of forces and moments of particles and rigid
CO1
bodies both in two dimensions and in three dimensions.
CO2 Apply the knowledge of trusses in frames, beams and machine components.
CO3 Contrast the effect of friction on equilibrium.
CO4 Illustrate the importance of properties of surfaces and solids.
CO5 Demonstrate the dynamic equilibrium equation.

CO1 3 3 2 1 3
CO2 3 2 2 1 2
CO3 3 3 2 1 3
CO4 3 2 2 1 2
CO5 3 1 1 1 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I: STATICS OF PARTICLES AND RIGID BODIES
Six Fundamental principles and concepts - vector algebra - Force Systems Basic concepts, Particle equilibrium in
2-D & 3-D - System of Forces, Coplanar Concurrent Forces, Components in Space – Resultant - Equations of
Equilibrium of Coplanar Systems and Spatial Systems. Rigid Body equilibrium in 2-D & 3-D - Moment of Forces
and its Application - Couples and Resultant of Force System - Equilibrium of System of Forces, Free body
diagrams - Equations of Equilibrium of Coplanar Systems and Spatial Systems.
Unit-II: ANALYSIS OF TRUSSES

Basic Structural Analysis- Equilibrium in three dimensions - Method of Sections- Method of Joints- How to
determine if a member is in tension or compression- Simple Trusses- Zero force members- Beams & types of
beams- Frames & Machines.
Unit-III: FRICTION
Types of friction, Limiting friction, Laws of Friction, Static and Dynamic Friction - Motion of Bodies, simple
contact friction, sliding block, wedge friction, screw jack & differential screw jack, rolling resistance.
Unit-IV: PROPERTIES OF SURFACES AND SOLIDS

Centroid of simple figures from first principle, centroid of composite sections - Centre of Gravity and its
implications - Area moment of inertia - Definition, Moment of inertia of plane sections from first principles,
Theorems of moment of inertia, Moment of inertia of standard sections (T section and I section) - Mass moment
inertia of circular plate, Cylinder, Cone, Sphere- Principal moment of inertia.
Unit-V: DYNAMICS
Review of particle dynamics - Displacements, velocity and acceleration, their relationship - Equations of motions
- Rectilinear motion- Plane curvilinear motion - Newton’s 2nd law- Impulse, momentum, impact - D’Alembert’s
principle and its applications in plane motion and connected bodies - Work energy principle and its application in
plane motion of connected bodies - Virtual Work and Energy Method - Virtual displacements, principle of virtual
work for particle and ideal system of rigid bodies.
Text Book(s):
1. F.P.Beer, and E.R.Johnson, “Vector Mechanics for Engineers – Statics and Dynamics”, Edition: 10,
McGraw Hill , 2017.
2. J.L.Merriam, “Engineering Mechanics”, Edition: 7, Wiley , 2017.
Reference(s):
1. H.Irving, Shames, “Engineering Mechanics, Statics and Dynamics”, Edition: 4, Prentice Hall of India
Ltd , 2017.
CSE18R171 : PROGRAMMING FOR PROBLEM L T P C

SOLVING 3 1 2 5
Pre-requisite: Nil
To make the students to understand the basic concepts of programming language, rules to be followed
while writing a program and how to compile and execute C programs.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Understand the basic programming concepts and syntax of C language
CO2 Develop efficient code using pointers, arrays and dynamic memory allocation techniques
CO3 Create user defined data types and functions to solve given problems
CO4 Design an efficient algorithm for a given problem
CO5 Build efficient code to solve the real-world problem

CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 1 3 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 3 2
CO4 3 2 2 2 3 2
CO5 3 3 2 2 3 2
CO6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I: INTRODUCTION TO PROGRAMMING
Introduction to components of a computer system (disks, memory, processor, where a program is stored and
executed, operating system, compilers etc.), Idea of Algorithm: steps to solve logical and numerical problems.
Representation of Algorithm: Flowchart/ Pseudocode with examples, from algorithms to programs; source code,
variables (with data types) variables and memory, locations, Syntax and Logical Errors in compilation, object and
executable code, Arithmetic expressions and precedence, Conditional Branching and Loops, Writing and
evaluation of conditionals and consequent branching, Iteration and loops.
Unit-II: ARRAYS AND STRINGS

Introduction - One dimensional and two-dimensional arrays – Declaration of arrays – Initializing and Accessing
array elements – Strings: One dimensional character arrays - Declaration and String Initialization - String
Manipulation - Multidimensional Arrays - Arrays of Strings
Unit-III: BASIC ALGORITHMS

Searching, Basic Sorting Algorithms (Bubble, Insertion and Selection), Finding roots of equations, notion of
order of complexity through example programs (no formal definition required)
Unit-IV: FUNCTION
Functions (including using built in libraries), Parameter passing in functions, call by value, passing arrays to
functions: idea of call by reference, Recursion, Recursion, as a different way of solving problems. Example
programs, such as Finding Factorial, Fibonacci series, Ackerman function etc. Quick sort or Merge sort.
Unit-V: STRUCTURE, POINTERS & FILE HANDLING

Structures, defining structures and Array of Structures, Idea of pointers, defining pointers, Use of Pointers in self-
referential structures, notion of linked list (no implementation), File handling (only if time is available, otherwise
should be done as part of the lab)
1. Tutorial 1: Problem solving using computers

2. Lab 1: Familiarization with programming environment
3. Tutorial 2: Variable types and type conversions:
4. Lab 2: Simple computational problems using arithmetic expressions
5. Tutorial 3: Branching and logical expressions:
6. Lab 3: Problems involving if-then-else structures
7. Tutorial 4: Loops, while and for loops:
8. Lab 4: Iterative problems e.g., sum of series
9. Tutorial 5: 1D Arrays: searching, sorting:
10. Lab 5: 1D Array manipulation
11. Tutorial 6: 2D arrays and Strings
12. Lab 6: Matrix problems, String operations
13. Tutorial 7: Functions, call by value:
14. Lab 7: Simple functions
15. Tutorial 8 &9: Numerical methods (Root finding, numerical differentiation, numerical integration):
16. Lab 8 and 9: Programming for solving Numerical methods problems
17. Tutorial 10: Recursion, structure of recursive calls
18. Lab 10: Recursive functions
19. Tutorial 11: Pointers, structures and dynamic memory allocation
20. Lab 11: Pointers and structures
21. Tutorial 12: File handling:
22. Lab 12: File operations
Text Book(s):
1. Byron Gottfried, “Schaum's Outline of Programming with C”, Edition: 1, McGraw Hill India , 2010.
2. E. Balagurusamy, “Programming in ANSI C”, Edition: 1, McGraw Hill India , 2012.
Reference(s):
1. W. Brian Kernighan and M. Dennis Ritchie, “The C Programming Language”, Edition: 1, PHI India ,
2009.
2. Stephen Prata , “C++ Primer Plus”, Edition: 6, Developers Library , 2017.
3. David Vandevoorde, “C++ Templates”, Edition: 2, McGraw Hill India , 2016.
L T P C
MEC18R152 : ENGINEERING PRACTICE
2 0 2 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
Course Type : Theory with practical
Apply skills of basic mechanical engineering in diverse contexts including operation, application,
classification, assemble, dismantle, maintenance and entrepreneurship, using critical thinking and
judgment by theoretical and practice.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Apply coherent and advanced knowledge of Lathe machines and their operations
CO2 Summarize the various Air-conditioning methodologies and their maintenance procedure
Compare the working of Two stroke & Four stroke engines and apply professional practice
CO3
to the operation and maintenance of Lead acid battery
Explain the working principle of Oven and Pumps and identify the working and
CO4
maintenance procedures
CO5 Identify the different types of Plumbing joints and demonstrate various layouts

CO1 2 1 2 2 1 2
CO2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO3 2 1 2 2 2 2 2
CO4 2 2 1 2 1 1
CO5 2 1 2 1 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I: BASIC MACHINING
Introduction - types of lathe machines - lathe accessories, work holding device and tool holding device - lathe
operations - Calculation of MRR for simple turning operation. Introduction to CNC turning machines.
Unit-II: AIR CONDITIONING

Introduction, types of air conditioning system, working of commercial air conditioner, components of AC
system, selection of suitable AC based on room size, AC ratings scheduled maintenance, assembling and
dismantling of window AC
Unit-III: AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEMS

Introduction – Classification - Purpose, capacity, fuel source, transmission system - working of two stroke and
four stroke engines. Introduction – types of batteries - construction – battery rating, scheduled maintenance of
four wheeler and two wheeler batteries – assembling and dismantling of lead acid battery - testing of voltage
Unit-IV: ENERGY AND FLOW DEVICES
Types of energy devices (Gas stove, Induction, Micro-oven), working principle of induction and micro oven,
commercial food preparing equipment, preventive maintenance check list, assembling and dismantling of gas
stove. Introduction – types of pump - centrifugal, jet pump, working of centrifugal and jet pump, assembly and
dismantling of pumps.
Unit-V: PLUMBING
Introduction - Plumbing Tools, Pipe – Piping layout symbol - Types of pipe joints - Pipe line diagram for
shower, washbasin and overhead tank. Selection of materials for shower, washbasin and overhead tank layouts.
Practical Modules:
1. Plain turning operation in Lathe
2. Filling and evacuating refrigerant gas procedure in refrigerant kit
3. Study on vehicle smoke testing
4. Two wheeler carburetor check-up
5. Charging and draining of a Lead-acid battery
6. Study on diesel pump service
7. Dismantling and assembling of Gas stove.
8. L- Halving (Or) Corner Lap Joint.
9. Study on arc and gas welding practices
10. Plumbing layout for shower and washbasin connections
11. L-Fitting
Text Book(s):
1. S. Suyambazhahan, “Engineering Practices”, Edition: 2, PHI Learning , 2012.
2. S.K. Hajra Choudhury, A.K .Hajra Choudhury and Nirjhar Roy, “Elements of Workshop Technology
Vol. I & Vol. II”, Edition: 15, Media promoters and publishers private limited , 2010.
Reference(s):
1. P.N.Ananthanarayanan, “Basic Refrigeration and Air-conditioning”, Edition: 4, Mc Graw Hill , 2013.
2. Eric Kleinert, “Troubleshooting and Repairing “Major Appliances”, Edition: 3, McGraw-Hill
Education , 2012.
3. M. Adithan, S.C. Laroiya, “Practical Refrigeration & Air-conditioning”, Edition: 5, New age
international publishers , 2011.
L T P C
ECE18R222 : BASIC ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING
3 1 0 4
Pre-requisite: Nil
To provide an overview of electronic device components to Mechanical engineering students
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Understand the principles of semiconductor devices and their applications.
CO2 Design an application using Operational amplifier.
CO3 Understand the working of timing circuits and oscillators.
CO4 Understand logic gates, flip flop as a building block of digital systems.
CO5 Learn the basics of Electronic communication system.

CO1 3 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 2
CO3 1 2
CO4 3 3
CO5 3 2 3
Course Topics:
Unit-I: SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS
Introduction to P-N junction Diode and V-I characteristics, Zener diode and its characteristics, Introduction to
BJT, its input-output and transfer characteristics, BJT as a single stage CE amplifier, frequency response and
bandwidth.
Unit-II: OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER AND ITS APPLICATIONS

Introduction to Op-Amp, CMRR, Block Diagram, Pin Configuration of 741 Op-Amp, Characteristics of Ideal Op-
Amp, Concept of Virtual Ground, summing and difference amplifier, unity gain buffer, integrator and
differentiator.
Unit-III: TIMING CIRCUITS AND OSCILLATORS

555 and its applications as astable and mono-stable multi-vibrators, positive feedback, Barkhausen's criteria for
oscillation, R-C phase shift and Wein bridge oscillator.
Unit-IV: DIGITAL ELECTRONICS FUNDAMENTALS

Difference between analog and digital signals, Boolean algebra, Basic and Universal Gates, Symbols, Truth
tables, logic expressions, Logic simplification using K- map, multiplexers, demultiplexers, flip-flops, Block
diagram of microprocessor/microcontroller and their applications.
Unit-V: ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

The elements of communication system, IEEE frequency spectrum, Transmission media: wired and wireless,
need of modulation, Mobile communication systems: cellular concept and block diagram of GSM system.
Text Book(s):
1. A.David Bell, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Edition: 5, Oxford University Press , 2008.
2. Floyd, “Electronic Devices”, Edition: 9, Pearson Education , 2016.
Reference(s):
1. R P Jain, “Modern Digital Electronics”, Edition: 4, McGraw Hill , 2009.
2. Frenzel, “Communication Electronics: Principles and Applications”, Edition: 3, McGraw Hill , 2002.
L T P C
MEC18R202 : THERMODYNAMICS
3 1 0 4
Course Category: Program Core Courses
Pre-requisite: CHY18R171- Chemistry
• To learn about work & heat interactions and energy balance in systems
• To learn about application of 1st law of thermodynamics
• To learn about second law of thermodynamics and its limitation
• To learn about the properties of pure substances and related application
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Outline the fundamental concepts and first law of thermodynamics
CO2 Interpret the idea of second law of thermodynamics
CO3 Construct the limitation of thermodynamic laws
CO4 Extend the properties of pure substances
CO5 Apply pure substance behavior in vapour power cycles.

CO1 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO3 3 3 1 2 1 1 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 3
Course Topics:
Unit-I: FUNDAMENTALS OF THERMODYNAMICS, ZEROTH AND FIRST LAW
Fundamentals - System & Control volume; Property, State & Process; Work – modes of work; Path dependence
of displacement work, Temperature, Definition of thermal equilibrium and Zeroth law and Temperature scales,
first Law for Cyclic & Non-cyclic processes; Concept of total energy E; Various modes of energy, Internal
energy and Enthalpy. First Law for Flow Processes - Derivation of general energy equation for a control
volume, Steady state steady flow processes including throttling; Examples of steady flow devices and First law
applications for system and control volume.
Unit-II: SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS

Second law - Definitions of direct and reverse heat engines; Definitions of thermal efficiency and COP; Kelvin-
Planck and Clausius statements; Definition of reversible process; Internal and external irreversibility; Carnot
cycle; Absolute temperature scale.
Unit-III: ANALYSIS OF SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS

Clausius inequality; Definition of entropy S ; Demonstration that entropy S is a property, Illustration of
processes in T-s coordinates, Evaluation of S for solids, liquids, ideal gases. Principle of increase of entropy,
Definition of Isentropic efficiency for compressors turbines and nozzles, Irreversibility and Availability and
Illustration of processes in T-s coordinates
Unit-IV: PURE SUBSTANCES

Definition of Pure substance, Properties of two phase systems - Const. temperature and Const. pressure heating
of water; Definitions of saturated states; P-v-T surface; Use of steam tables Saturation tables; Superheated
tables; Identification of states & determination of properties, Mollier’s chart.
Unit-V: VAPOUR POWER CYCLES

Basic Rankine cycle, with superheat, reheat and regeneration comparison with Carnot cycle.
Text Book(s):
1. P.K.Nag, “Engineering Thermodynamics”, Edition: 6, Tata McGraw-Hill Co. Ltd. , 2017.
2. Y.A.Cengel, “Thermodynamics – An Engineering Approach”, Edition: 8, Tata Mc Graw Hill, New
delhi , 2017.
Reference(s):
1. E.Radhakrishnan, “Fundamentals of Engineering thermodynamics”, Edition: 2, Prentice hall , 2005.
2. J.P.Holman, “Thermodynamics”, Edition: Third Edition, McGraw-Hill , 2008.
3. E.Richard Sonntag Claus Borgnakke, “fundamentals of thermodynamics”, Edition: 7, Wiley , 2009.
L T P C
MEC18R272 : FLUIDMECHANICS & MACHINERY
3 0 2 4
Pre-requisite: MAT18R101- Calculus Course Category: Program Core Courses
and Linear Course Type : Integrated Course
To covert the basic principles and equation of fluid mechanics and to present numerous and diverse real
world engineering examples to give students a feel for how fluid mechanics is applied in engineering
practice.
Course Outcome(s):
Identity the different properties of fluid and learning the different types of pressure
CO1
measuring devices for various applications.
Interpret the kinematics and dynamics of fluid flow and analyze the Bernoulli’s equation to
CO2
real time problem
CO3 Judging the different types of losses occurs in a pipe when fluid flows
Contrast the working principle of different turbines and analyze the performance
CO4
Calculation of different turbines
Categorize the working principles of different pumps and focus the performance
CO5
Calculation of different pumps

CO1 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 3 1 1 2 2 2 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I: BASIC CONCEPTS AND PROPERTIES
Fluid–definition, distinction between solid and fluid-units and dimensions, properties of fluids-density, specific
weight, specific volume, specific gravity, temperature, viscosity, compressibility, vapour pressure, capillary and
surface tension- fluid statics-concept of fluid static pressure, absolute and gauge pressures-pressure measurements
by manometers.
Unit-II: FLUID KINEMATICS AND FLUID DYNAMICS

Fluid kinematics - flow visualization, lines of flow, types of flow, velocity field and acceleration, continuity
equation(one and three dimensional differential forms)-equation of streamline, stream function, velocity potential
function, circulation, flow net, fluid dynamics-equations of motion, Euler's equation along a streamline,
Bernoulli's equation, applications - Venturimeter, Orifice meter, Pitot tube - dimensional analysis -
Buckingham's Π theorem and its applications-similarity laws and models
Unit-III: INCOMPRESSIBLE FLUID FLOW

Viscousflow-Navier-Stoke'sequation(Statement only)-shearstress, pressure gradient relationship, Couette flow-
laminar flow between parallel plates, Laminar flow through circular tubes (Hagen Poiseulle's) - flow through
pipes - Darcy - Weisback's equation, Moody’s diagram- friction factor minor losses– flow through pipes in series
and in parallel –boundary layer flows, boundary layer thickness, boundary layer separation, measures of boundary
layer thickness
Unit-IV: HYDRAULIC TURBINES

Fluid machines-definition and classification-exchange of energy-Euler's equation for turbo machines-
construction of velocity vector diagrams- head and specific work – components of energy transfer-degree of
reaction. Hydro turbines-definition and classifications- Pelton wheel, Francis turbine, propeller turbine, Kaplan
turbine–working principles-velocity triangles, work done ,specific speed, efficiencies, performance curve for
turbines.
Unit-V: HYDRAULIC PUMPS

Pumps- definition and classifications - Centrifugal pump - classifications, working principle, velocity triangles,
specific speed, efficiency and performance curves - reciprocating pump classification, working principle, indicator
diagram, work saved by air vessels and performance curves - cavitations in pumps - rotary pumps - working
principles of gear and vane pumps, performance of positive displacement pump.
1. Determination of the Coefficient of discharge of given Orifice meter.
2. Determination of the Coefficient of discharge of given Venturimeter.
3. Calculation of the rate of flow using Rotameter.
4. Determination of friction factor for a given set of pipes.
5. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Centrifugal pump / Submergible pump.
6. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of reciprocating pump.
7. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Gear pump.
8. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Pelton wheel.
9. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristics curves of Francis turbine.
10. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic Kaplan turbine
Text Book(s):
1. V. L Streeter, and E.B Wylie, “Fluid Mechanics”, Edition: 9, McGraw-Hill , 2010.
2. K.L. Kumar, “Engineering Fluid Mechanics”, Edition: 8, S.Chand Publication (P) Ltd, New Delhi ,
2010.
Reference(s):
1. V.P Vasandani, “Hydraulic Machines - Theory and Design”, Edition: 11, Khanna Publishers , 2010.
2. R.K Bansal, “Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulics Machines”, Edition: 9, Laxmi publications (P) Ltd,
New Delhi , 2017.
3. F.M White, “Fluid Mechanics”, Edition: 8, Tata McGraw-Hill , 2015.
L T P C
MEC18R274 : THERMAL ENGINEERING
3 0 2 4
Pre-requisite: MEC18R202- Course Category: Program Core Courses
Thermodynamics Course Type : Integrated Course
This course will make the student to understand the process and applications undergoing with respect
to the gas power cycles, nozzles, diffusers and refrigeration system. This would make them to
thorough the concepts with elaborate idea and analysis with some practical Knowledge.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Employ the basic concepts behind the gas power cycles with ability to acquire solutions.
Interpret the knowledge gained in the concepts on flow of steam through nozzle, diffuser
CO2
and turbines
CO3 Analyse and acquire solutions to the problems involved in the air compressors
CO4 Illustrate the basic ideas about the properties and process involved in psychrometry
CO5 Solve the basic problems and interpret the concepts behind the refrigeration system

CO1 3 3 3 2 2 3 2
CO2 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 3 2
CO4 3 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 2 2 3 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I: GAS POWER CYCLES
Air standard Otto, Diesel and Dual cycles-Air standard Brayton cycle –Calculation of mean effective pressure
and air standard efficiency, effect of reheat, regeneration and intercooling.
Unit-II: NOZZLES, DIFFUSER AND TURBINES

Flow of steam through nozzles & Shape of nozzles - Effect of friction - Critical pressure ratio - Supersaturated
flow - Steam turbine – Impulse and Reaction principles - Compounding, velocity diagrams for simple and
multistage turbines.
Unit-III: AIR COMPRESSOR
Reciprocating compressors, Effect of clearance and volumetric efficiency. Adiabatic, Isothermal and
Mechanical efficiencies, staging of reciprocating compressors, optimal stage pressure ratio, effect of
intercooling, minimum work for multistage reciprocating compressors
Unit-IV: PSYCHROMETRY
Psychrometry - atmospheric air and psychrometric properties – dry bulb temperature, wet bulb temperature,
dew point temperature, partial pressures, specific and relative humidity, enthalpy and adiabatic saturation
temperature - construction and use of psychrometric chart - analysis of various processes- heating, cooling,
dehumidifying and humidifying- adiabatic mixing of stream, summer and winter air-conditioning
Unit-V: REFRIGERATION
Vapor compression refrigeration system-description, Analysis Refrigerating effect -Power required, Unit of
refrigeration, COP - Refrigerants and their desirable properties. Reversed Carnot cycle, Reversed Brayton cycle
- Vapor absorption refrigeration system.
1. Port timing diagram
2. Valve timing diagram
3. Performance test on four stroke diesel engine
4. Performance test on single stage air compressor
5. Performance test on two stage air compressor
6. Determination of flash point and fire point using open cup apparatus
7. Determination of flash point and fire point using closed cup apparatus
8. Determination of viscosity using Saybolt viscometer.
9. Determination of viscosity using Redwood viscometer.
Text Book(s):
1. R. K. Rajput, “Thermal Engineering”, Edition: 8, Laxmi Publication , 2010.
2. M. Mahesh Rathore, “Thermal Engineering”, Edition: 1, Mcgraw Higher ed , 2012.
Reference(s):
1. Frank Krieth, “The CRC Handbook of Thermal Engineering,”, Edition: 1, Springer-Verlag Berlin
Heidelberg , 2000.
2. P.K. Ballaney, “Thermal Engineering: Engineering Thermodynamics & Energy Conversion
Techniques”, Edition: 5, Khanna Publishers , 2005.
3. R.S. Khurmi, “A Textbook of Thermal Engineering: Mechanical Technology”, Edition: 1, S, Chand ,
2006.
L T P C
MEC18R271 : STRENGTH OF MATERIALS
3 0 2 4
Pre-requisite: MEC18R211 - Course Category: Program Core Courses
Engineering Mechanics Course Type : Integrated Course
To acquire knowledge in the concepts of stress, strain and deformation of solids and two dimensional
bodies, beams and supports, beams deflection, torsion in springs and shafts
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Analyse the simple stresses in bars, composite bars and thermal stresses
Analyse the stresses in two dimensional bodies and evaluating the deformation in thin
CO2
cylinder and spherical shells
Demonstrate shear force, bending moment and stress distribution of various types of beams
CO3
with different support
CO4 Analyzing the deflection of the beams through various methods
Illustrate the deflection of all types of shafts due to torsion and deformation various types of
CO5
springs

CO1 3 2 3 2 1 3 1
CO2 3 2 3 2 2 3 1
CO3 3 2 3 2 1 3 1
CO4 3 2 3 2 1 3 1
CO5 3 2 3 2 3 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I: STRESS, STRAIN AND DEFORMATION IN SOLIDS
Tension, compression and shear stresses – Hook’s law – stress- ultimate stress and working stress – elastic
constants and relationships between them – composite bars – thermal stresses.
Unit-II: STRESS AND DEFORMATION IN TWO DIMENSIONAL BODIES

Two dimensional state of stress at a point – normal and shear stresses on any plane, principal planes and
principal stresses – graphical method– Mohr’s Circle - stresses and deformations in thin cylinders and spherical
shells due to internal pressure
Unit-III: BEAMS AND SUPPORTS

Types of beam supports – cantilevers, simply supported, overhanging beams. Types of loadings – shear force –
bending moment diagram. Theories of bending – bending stress distribution – load carrying capacity for point
and distributed loads.
Unit-IV: DEFLECTION IN BEAMS

Deflection in beams using double integral method – area moment method for computation of slopes and
deflection in beams – moment of inertia – Maxwell’s reciprocal theorems.
Unit-V: TORSION IN SPRINGS AND SHAFTS

Torsional stresses and deformation in solid shafts, hollow shafts– deflection in solid shafts for fixed ends.
Helical springs – leaf springs – stresses in springs – Torsion and deformation – deflections in spring
1. Tension test on mild steel rod
2. Compression test
3. Torsion test on mild steel rod
4. Impact test on metal specimen
5. Hardness test on metals - Brinell, Rockwell hardness number
6. Deflection test on beams
7. Stiffness test on helical springs.
8. Double shear test on mild steel rod.
9. Pin on disk – exercise on mild steel plate.
Text Book(s):
1. E.P Popov, “Engineering Mechanics of solids”, Edition: 8, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi , 2014.
2. S.M.A Kazimi, “Solid Mechanics”, Edition: 4, Tata McGraw Hill Book Co Ltd , 2017.
Reference(s):
1. R.K Rajput, “Strength of Materials”, Edition: 8, S. Chand Publications , 2009.
2. R.K Bansal, “Strength of Materials”, Edition: 4, Laxmi Publications , 2015.
3. P. Stephen Timoshenko, “History of Strength of Materials”, Edition: 1, McGraw Hill Book Co Ltd ,
1953.
L T P C
MEC18R208 : MATERIALS SCIENCE
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: PHY18R171 - Course Category: Program Core Courses
Introduction to Electromagnetic Theory Course Type : Theory
1. Understanding of the correlation between the internal structure of materials, their mechanical
properties and various methods to quantify their mechanical integrity and failure criteria.
2. To provide a detailed interpretation of equilibrium phase diagrams
3. Learning about different phases and heat treatment methods to tailor the properties of Fe-C alloys.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Identify the micro-structures and properties of materials
Ability to construct the phase diagrams of various solid solutions and to identify the
CO2
presence of various phases with the addition of alloying elements
CO3 Discuss various heat-treatment procedures for specific applications
Categorize the plastics, ceramics and composites to replace metallic materials in several
CO4
machineries
Classify various properties of materials and to identify appropriate materials for different
CO5
applications and environmental conditions.

CO1 3 2 1 2 3 1
CO2 3 2 3 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 3 3 2
CO5 3 3 2 3 3
Course Topics:
Unit-I: BASICS
Types of bonds in solids, crystal structure of metals, defects in metallic structure, plastic deformation of metals,
binary alloys - mechanism of plastic deformation, slip, twinning, stacking faults, deformation bands and strain
hardening.
Unit-II: CONSTITUTION OF ALLOYS AND PHASE DIAGRAM

Constitution of alloys – solid solutions - substitutional and interstitial, phase diagrams, isomorphous, eutectic,
peritectic, eutectoid and peritectroid reactions, iron – iron carbide equilibrium diagram - classification of steel
and cast iron – microstructure, properties and applications.
Unit-III: HEAT TREATMENT

Annealing - full annealing, stress relief, recrystallisation and spheroidizing – normalizing - hardening and
tempering of steel - isothermal transformation diagrams – cooling curves superimposed on I.T. diagram -
hardenability, jominy end quench test – austempering, martempering – case hardening - carburising, nitriding,
cyaniding, carbonitriding – flame and induction hardening.
Unit-IV: ALLOYS AND POLYMERS

Nickel and nickel alloys – inconel, Monel, etc , Copper and copper alloys – brass, bronze and cupronickel –
aluminum and al-cu – precipitation strengthening treatment – polymers, composites, ceramics, glasses- their
fabrication, processing methods, engineering properties and applications.
Unit-V: TESTING OF MATERIALS AND FRACTURE

Mechanical properties of materials, testing of materials - surface modifications of metals for specific
engineering application, tribological properties of metals and non-metals - types of fracture – testing of
materials under tension, compression and shear loads – hardness tests (Brinell, Vickers and Rockwell), impact
test- Izod and Charpy - fatigue and creep test.
Text Book(s):
1. G.Kenneth Budinski and K. Michael Budinski, “Engineering Materials”, Edition: 4, Prentice-Hall of
India , 2002.
Reference(s):
1. D.William Callister Jr, “Material Science and Engineering”, Edition: 6, John Wiley and Sons , 2005.
2. V.Raghavan, “Material Science and Engineering”, Edition: 1, Prentice Hall of India , 1999.
3. H. Sydney Avner, “Introduction to Physical Metallurgy”, Edition: 1, McGraw Hill Book Company ,
1994.
L T P C
MEC18R210 : INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROL
3 0 0 3
Course Category: Program Core Courses
Pre-requisite: Nil
1. To provide a basic knowledge about measurement systems and their components
2. To learn about various sensors used for measurement of mechanical quantities
3. To learn about system stability and control
4. To integrate the measurement systems with the process for process monitoring and
Control
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Interpret the basic concepts of measurement
CO2 Illustrate the response of the signals and their conditioning
CO3 Relate the sensor basics and its applications
CO4 Make use of sensor for industrial applications
CO5 Solve the control system for the instruments

CO1 3 2 1 2
CO2 3 2 1 2
CO3 3 2 1 2 2
CO4 3 2 1 2
CO5 3 2 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I: MEASUREMENTS
SI units, systematic and random errors in measurement, expression of uncertainty - accuracy and precision index,
propagation of errors. PMMC, MI and dynamometer type instruments; dc potentiometer; bridges for measurement
of R, L and C, Q -meter. Measurement of voltage, current and power in single and three phase circuits; ac and dc
current probes; true rms meters, voltage and current scaling, instrument transformers, timer/counter, time, phase
and frequency measurements, digital voltmeter, digital multimeter; oscilloscope, shielding and grounding.
Unit-II: SIGNAL PROCESSING AND CONDITIONING

Periodic, aperiodic and impulse signals; Laplace, Fourier and z -transforms; transfer function, frequency response
of first and second order linear time invariant systems, impulse response of systems; onvolution, correlation.
Discrete time system: impulse response, frequency response, pulse transfer function; DFT and FFT; basics of IIR
and FIR filters.
Unit-III: MICRO SENSORS AND ACTUATORS

Micro Sensors: Principles and examples, Force and pressure micro sensors,position and speed micro sensors,
acceleration micro sensors, chemical sensors,biosensors, temperature micro sensors and flow micro sensors.Micro
Actuators: Actuation principle, shape memory effects-one way, two way and pseudo elasticity. Types of micro
actuators- Electrostatic, Magnetic, Fluidic, Inverse piezo effect, other principles.
Unit-IV: SENSORS AND INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION

Resistive-, capacitive-, inductive-, piezoelectric-, Hall Effect sensors and associated signal conditioning circuits;
transducers for industrial instrumentation: displacement (linear and angular), velocity, acceleration, force, torque,
vibration, shock, pressure (including low pressure), flow (differential pressure, variable area, electromagnetic,
ultrasonic, turbine and open channel flow meters) temperature (thermocouple, bolometer, RTD (3/4 wire),
thermistor, pyrometer and semiconductor); liquid level, pH, conductivity and viscosity measurement.
Unit-V: CONTROL SYSTEMS

Feedback principles, signal flow graphs, transient response, steady -state-errors, Bode plot, phase and gain
margins, Routh and Nyquist criteria, root loci, design of lead, lag and lead -lag compensators, state -space
representation of systems; time- delay systems; mechanical, hydraulic and pneumatic system components, synchro
pair, servo and stepper motors, servo valves; on- off, P, P -I, P -I-D, cascade, feed forward, and ratio controllers.
Text Book(s):
1. W. Bolton, “Instrumentation and control systems”, Edition: 1, Newnes , 2004.
2. G.Thomas. Beckwith, D.Roy Marangoni, H. John, V.Lienhard, “Mechanical Measurements”, Edition:
6, Pearson Education India , 2007.
Reference(s):
1. K.Gregory McMillan, “Process/Industrial Instruments and Controls Handbook”, Edition: 5, McGraw-
Hill , 1999.
L T P C
MEC18R303 : DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: MEC18R271- Strength Course Category: Program Core Courses
of Materials Course Type : Theory
 To introduce students to the design and theory of common machine elements and to give students
experience in solving design problems involving machine elements.
 To synergize forces, moments, torques, stress and strength information to develop ability to
analyze, design and/or select machine elements – with attention to safety, reliability, and societal
and fiscal aspects.
 To require the student to prepare professional quality solutions and presentations to effectively
communicate the results of analysis and design
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Solve simple stresses in beams, hooks and shafts.
CO2 Design shafts, keys and couplings for power transmission.
CO3 Estimate load carrying capacity of threads and welds joints.
CO4 Select springs and levers for different applications.
CO5 Interpret the use of sliding and rolling contact bearings.

CO1 3 2 2 2 1 1 3 1
CO2 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 1
CO3 3 2 3 2 1 2 3 1
CO4 3 2 3 2 1 2 3 1
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 2 3 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I: SIMPLE STRESSES
Basics in Engineering Design – preferred numbers, fits and tolerances – Types of simple stresses – static and
varying loading – combined loading – theories of failures – allowable stress – factor of safety – stress
concentration factor – fluctuating stress- design for combined fatigue loading Soderberg, Goodman and Gerber
relations.
Unit-II: DESIGN OF SHAFTS, KEYS AND COUPLINGS

Design principles of shafts – static, fatigue loading – critical speed. Design of keys. Design of couplings.
Unit-III: DESIGN OF TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT JOINTS

Welded joints: Types of welded joints- weld symbols, strength of welds- centrally loaded joints- axially loaded
joints-eccentrically loaded joints. Threaded joints: I.S.O. Metric screw threads- treaded joints in tension-
fluctuating load- torque requirement for tightening and eccentrically loaded bolted joints.
Unit-IV: DESIGN OF SPRINGS

Helical springs and leaf springs: Stresses and deflection in helical springs - Design of leaf springs- stress and
deflection - exercise problems in springs used for automobiles
Unit-V: DESIGN OF BEARINGS

Sliding contact bearings: Theory of lubrication- hydrodynamic bearings-Sommer field number- design of
hydrodynamic bearings. Rolling contact bearings: Static and dynamic load capacity- cubic mean load- variable
load-probability of survival- selection of deep groove and angular contact ball bearings.
Text Book(s):
1. V.Bhandari, “Design of Machine Elements”, Edition: 4, Tata McGraw-Hill Book Co , 2016.
2. Joseph Shigley, Charles Mischke,Richard Budynas and Keith Nisbett, “Mechanical Engineering
Design”, Edition: 9, Tata McGraw-Hill , 2011.
Reference(s):
1. “Design Data book”, Edition: 5, PSG College of Technology, Coimbatore , 2016.
2. T.V.Sundararajamoorthy, N.Shanmugam, “Machine Design”, Edition: 1, Anuradha Publications ,
2012.
3. C. Robert Juvinall and M. Kurt Marshek, “Fundamentals of Machine Design”, Edition: 4, Wiley ,
2005.
L T P C
MEC18R373 : HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER
3 0 2 4
Pre-requisite: MEC18R274 - Thermal Course Category: Program Core Courses
Engineering Course Type : Integrated Course
To evaluate various modes of heat transfer and design of heat exchangers and to enable students to do
experimentation on heat transfer equipment’s and enhance practical knowledge of various systems.
Course Outcome(s):
Apply basic principles of heat transfer for solving problems and demonstrate fundamentals
CO1
principles of heat transfer in practice
CO2 Solve free and forced convection problems using correlations and perform experimentation
CO3 Analyse the performance of heat exchangers and demonstrate in practice.
CO4 Evaluate radiation problems using perform correlations and experimentation
CO5 Assess different mass transfer systems

CO1 3 2 3 2 1 2 2 3
CO2 3 3 3 2 3 2 1 2 3 2
CO3 3 3 2 1 2 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 2 2 2 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 2 1 2 2 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I: CONDUCTION
Introduction to three modes of heat transfer, Derivation of heat balance equation- Steady one dimensional solution
for conduction heat transfer in Cartesian, cylindrical and spherical geometry, concept of conduction and film
resistances, critical insulation thickness, lumped system approximation and Biot number, heat transfer through
pin fins- Two dimensional conduction solutions for both steady and unsteady heat transfer-approximate solution
to unsteady conduction heat transfer by the use of Heissler charts
Unit-II: CONVECTION
Heat convection, basic equations, boundary layers- Forced convection, external and internal flows- Natural
convective heat transfer- Dimensionless parameters for forced and free convection heat transfer-Correlations for
forced and free convection- Approximate solutions to laminar boundary layer equations (momentum and energy)
for both internal and external flow- Estimating heat transfer rates in laminar and turbulent flow situations using
appropriate correlations for free and forced convection.
Unit-III: CONVECTIVE PHASE CHANGE HEAT TRANSFER AND HEAT

EXCHANGERS
Condensation and boiling – boiling modes, correlations, forced convection boiling, laminar film condensation on
a vertical plate, turbulent film condensation - heat exchangers – design procedure for heat exchanger-LMTD and
NTU analysis, fouling factor, effectiveness
Unit-IV: RADIATION
Radiation – laws of radiation, black body radiation, shape factor, radiation exchange between black and gray
surfaces, radiosity and irradiation, irradiation shields.
Unit-V: MASS TRANSFER

Mass transfer – Fick’s law of diffusion, diffusion mass transfer, forced convective mass transfer, heat and mass
transfer analogies.
1. Determination of thermal conductivity of insulating powder.
2. Determination of overall heat transfer coefficient using composite wall apparatus.
3. Determination of emissivity using emissivity apparatus.
4. Determination of heat transfer coefficient in natural convection mode.
5. Determination of heat transfer coefficient in natural and forced convection mode in pin-fin apparatus.
6. Determination of Stefan Boltzmann constant using test rig.
7. Determination of effectiveness of Parallel flow and counter flow heat exchanger.
8. Determination of heat transfer coefficient in forced convection mode.
9. Determination of thermal conductivity using Lagged Pipe apparatus
Text Book(s):
1. R.C Sachdeva, “Fundamentals of Engineering Heat and Mass Transfer”, Edition: 5, New Age
International Publishers , 2017.
2. A. Yunus Cengel and J. Afshin Ghajar, “Heat and Mass Transfer: Fundamentals and Applications
(SIE)”, Edition: 5, Tata Mc Graw Hill publications , 2017.
Reference(s):
1. R. Yadav, “Heat and Mass Transfer”, Edition: 1, Central Publishing House , 1995.
2. P.K Nag, “Heat Transfer”, Edition: 3, Tata McGraw-Hill , 2011.
3. J.P Holman, “Heat and Mass Transfer”, Edition: 10, Tata McGraw-Hill , 2011.
L T P C
MEC18R351 : FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS
3 0 2 4
Pre-requisite: MEC18R271-Strength of Course Category: Program Core Courses
Materials Course Type : Theory with practical
This course enables the students to virtually test and predict the behavior of mechanical structures in
addition to solving complex engineering problems
Course Outcome(s):
Apply the knowledge of mathematics and finite element concept to solve engineering
CO1
problems.
Recognize the basic principle of Finite Element Analysis in 1D structural and heat transfer
CO2
application
CO3 Ability to solve 2-D structural and thermal problem using FEA.
CO4 Analyze the iso parametic element formulation using FEA
CO5 Evaluate the Vibration and Torsion of non-circular shafts.

CO1 3 3 3 2 3 1 1 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 3 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 3 2
CO4 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 3 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 3 2
Course Topics:
Historical Background, Mathematical modeling of field problems in engineering, governing equations, discrete
and continuous models, boundary and initial value problems, Weighted Residual Methods, Variational
formulation of boundary value problems, Ritz technique, Basic concept of Finite Element Method.
Unit-II: ONE DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS

One dimensional second order equation, discretization, linear and higher order elements, derivation of shape
functions, Stiffness matrix and force vectors, assembly of elemental matrices, solution of problems from solid
mechanics and heat transfer.
Unit-III: TWO DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS

Two dimensional equations, variational formulation, finite element formulation, triangular elements- shape
functions, elemental matrices and RHS vectors; application to thermal problems, Plane stresses and plane strain
problems, body forces and thermal loads, plate and shell elements.
Unit-IV: ISOPARAMETRIC ELEMENTS FORMULATION

Natural coordinate systems, isoparametric elements and shape functions, numerical integration and application
to plane stress problems, matrix solution techniques, solution of dynamic problems, and introduction to FE
software.
Unit-V: VIBRATION AND TORSION PROBLEMS

Longitudinal vibration and mode shapes, fourth order beam equation, transverse deflections and natural
frequencies, Torsion of non-circular shafts, quadrilateral and higher order elements
Practical Modules:
1. Stress analysis of a plate with a circular hole
2. Stress analysis of rectangular L – bracket
3. Mode frequency analysis of a 2D component
4. Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever, Simply supported, Fixed ends)
5. Stress analysis of beams (Cantilever, Simply supported, Fixed ends)
Text Book(s):
1. J.N Reddy , “An Introduction to Finite Element Method”, Edition: 3, Tata McGraw Hill , 2006.
2. P. Seshu , “Text Book of Finite Element Analysis”, Edition: 2, Prentice Hall , 2013.
Reference(s):
1. S.S.Rao, “The Finite Element Method in Engineering”, Edition: 3, Butterworth Heinemann , 2004..
2. Chandraputla & Belegundu, “Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering”, Edition: 4, Prentice
Hall , 2011.
L T P C
MEC18R302 : MANUFACTURING PROCESSES
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: MEC18R152 – Course Category: Program Core Courses
Engineering Practice Course Type : Theory
To motivate and challenge students to understand and develop an appreciation of the processes in
correlation with material properties which change the shape, size and form of the raw materials into
the desirable product by conventional or unconventional manufacturing methods.
Course Outcome(s):
Contrast the casting process, to classify the various casting processes and to identify the
CO1
various casting defects
CO2 Explain various welding, brazing and analyze the effect of thermal cutting process
Illustrate various bulk deformation processes and able to design bulk deformation
CO3
components
CO4 Categorize the metal forming manufacturing processes
Judge the cutting tool to be chosen, to measure the tool life, to compare various machines
CO5 for machining processes and to choose the working holding and tool holding devices for the
machines and machining processes.

CO1 3 3 2 2 3 1 2 1 1 2 3
CO2 3 3 2 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 1 1 2 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I: METAL CASTING PROCESS
Moulding sands - types and properties - patterns – types, selection of patterns, pattern allowances - design of
patterns - classifications of castings according to mould materials and moulding methods- forces acting on the
molding flasks -short & long freezing range alloys – solidification and cooling – riser and gating design – design
considerations – special casting techniques - fettling and finishing of castings - defects in castings.
Unit-II: FABRICATION PROCESS

Classification of welding process - principle of gas welding - arc welding – resistance welding - solid state
welding - thermo-chemical welding - radiant energy welding – brazing and soldering - Heat affected zones in
welding, Methods to minimize HAZ- thermal cutting of metals or alloys.
Unit-III: BULK DEFORMATION PROCESSES

Forging - classification of forging processes, forging defects and inspection-Strain hardening, Recovery,
Recrystallization and grain growth - rolling - classification of rolling processes, rolling mill, rolling of bars and
shapes - extrusion - classification of extrusion processes, extrusion equipments
Unit-IV: FORMING PROCESS

Sheet metal forming - High velocity forming - explosive forming, electro hydraulic forming magnetic pulse
forming - pneumatic - mechanical high velocity forming. Plastic forming - Plastics - types of plastics - plastic
moulding processes, defects in plastics, Powder metallurgy- Introduction, Production of component.
Unit-V: MACHINING PROCESS

Mechanics of machining, single and multipoint cutting tool, tool - geometry, life and wear - Lathe - Capstan and
Turret lathe - Drilling and Boring machine classification, principles of working - work holding and tool holding
devices.
Text Book(s):
1. R.K.Jain, “Production Technology”, Edition: 1 , Khanna Publishersa , 2002.
2. P.Mikell Groover, “Fundamentals of Modern Manufacturing: Materials, Processes, and Systems”,
Edition: 3, Wiley , 2010.
Reference(s):
1. A.Ghosh, and A.K.Malik, “Manufacturing Science”, Edition: 1, Affiliated East west Press Pvt. Ltd. ,
2008.
2. Serope Kalpakjian and R.Steven Schmid, “Manufacturing Engineering and Technology”, Edition: 7,
3. PC. Pandey, H.S.Shan, “Modern machining processes”, Edition: 1, Tata McGraw-Hill. , 1981.
L T P C
MEC18R374 : KINEMATICS & THEORY OF MACHINES
3 0 2 4
Engineering Mechanics Course Type : Integrated Course
To acquire the knowledge in basic of mechanics, cam profile, vibration and control mechanisms,
balancing of machines
Course Outcome(s):
Apply the knowledge of simple mechanisms gained in real time applications by fabricating
CO1
it.
Create and analyze the velocity and acceleration of various mechanisms by applying
CO2
relative principle.
CO3 Design, develop and analyze profile of CAM for any applications
Apply the concept of balancing and use it for reducing the unbalanced forces in rotating
CO4
masses and reciprocating engines.
Apply different damping methods to minimize vibrations and Calculating gyroscopic couple
CO5
on various vehicles.

CO1 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 3 2
CO2 3 2 3 1 1 1 3 1 1
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 3 3
CO4 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 3 1 1
CO5 3 3 3 1 1 2 1 3 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I: BASICS OF MECHANISMS
Classification of mechanisms- Basic kinematic concepts and definitions- Degree of freedom, mobility- Grashof’s
law, Kinematic inversions of four bar chain and slider crank chains- Limit positions- Mechanical advantage-
Transmission angle- Description of some common mechanisms- Quick return mechanism, straight line
generators- Universal Joint- Rocker mechanisms
Unit-II: KINEMATICS
Displacement, velocity and acceleration analysis of simple mechanisms, graphical velocity analysis using
instantaneous centers, kinematic analysis of simple mechanisms- slider crank mechanism dynamics Coincident
points- Coriolis component of acceleration- introduction to linkage synthesis three position graphical synthesis
for motion and path generation.
Unit-III: CAM PROFILES

Classification of cams and followers- Terminology and definitions- Displacement diagrams- Uniform velocity,
parabolic, simple harmonic and cycloidal motions- derivatives of follower motions- specified contour cams-
circular and tangent cams- pressure angle and undercutting, sizing of cams, graphical and analytical disc cam
profile synthesis for roller and flat face followers
Unit-IV: BALANCING OF MACHINES

Static and dynamic balancing - balancing of rotating masses - balancing a single cylinder engine, balancing of
multi cylinder engines - partial balancing in locomotive engines - balancing linkages - balancing machines
Unit-V: VIBRATION AND CONTROL MECHANISM

Basic features of vibratory systems - Basic elements and lumping of parameters - Degrees of freedom – Single
degree of freedom - Free vibration - Equations of motion - natural frequency - Types of Damping - Gyroscopes -
Gyroscopic couple - Gyroscopic stabilization - Gyroscopic effects in aeroplanes and ships
1. Determination of Moment of Inertia by Oscillation
2. Determination of Speed and Sensitivity of a Porter Governor
3. Determination of Speed and Sensitivity of a Hardnell Governor.
4. Determination of Speed and Sensitivity of a Proell Governor.
5. Determination of Critical Speed of a Shaft using Whirling Apparatus.
6. Determination of Frequency of Transverse Vibration of a Free-Free Beam.
7. Determination of Natural Frequency of spring mass System Theoretically and Verify Experimentally.
8. Determination of Time Period for Oscillations of a Compound Pendulum.
9. Determination of the Natural frequency of Spring Mass System and Damping Factor its Coefficient
(Multi Degree of Freedom).
10. Study of simple, compound and epicyclic gear trains.
Text Book(s):
1. S.S Rattan, “Theory of Machines”, Edition: 4, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd , 2017.
2. Thomas Bevan, “Theory of Machines”, Edition: 3, CBS Publishers & Distributors , 2005.
Reference(s):
1. W.L Cleghorn, “Mechanisms of Machines”, Edition: 2, Oxford University Press , 2005.
2. L. Robert Norton, “Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery”, Edition: 1, Tata McGrawHill , 2009.
3. A. Ghosh and A.K Mallick, “Theory of Mechanisms and Machines”, Edition: 1, Affiliated East- West
Pvt. Ltd , 2008.
L T P C
MEC18R375 : METAL CUTTING TECHNOLOGY
3 0 2 4
Pre-requisite: MEC18R152 - Course Category: Program Core Courses
Engineering Practice Course Type : Integrated Course
To understand the basic concepts of cutting mechanism used in manufacturing Industry and
Tools used for production Technology and the measurements of various measuring
instruments and methods
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Illustrate the nomenclature of single and multipoint cutting tools
CO2 Describe the importance of the machinability index and economic machining
Summarize the various types of jigs and fixtures and their usage and application in related
CO3
machines
CO4 Evaluate the performance of linear and angular measuring instruments
Enumerate the assembly practices and various materials handlings Devices used in
CO5
industries

CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 1
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 1 3 2
CO4 3 2 1 2 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 2 1 2 2 1 3 2
Course Topics:
Geometry of cutting tools and tool nomenclature - single point and multiple point cutting tools and used for
turning – milling - drilling and broaching - cutting tool materials and their properties - grinding wheels and their
selections.
Unit-II: MACHINABILITY
Machinability - variables affecting machinability - machinability index - economics of machining - selection of
optimal machining conditions - productivity of machine tools
Unit-III: JIGS AND FIXTURE

Tooling for conventional and non-conventional machining processes: Mould and die design, Press tools,
Cutting tools; Holding tools: Jigs and fixtures, principles, applications and design; press tools – configuration,
design of die and punch; principles of forging die design.
Unit-IV: METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS

Metrology: Dimensions, forms and surface measurements, Limits, fits and tolerances; linear and angular
measurements; comparators; gauge design; interferometry; Metrology in tool wear and part quality including
surface integrity, alignment and testing methods; tolerance analysis in manufacturing and assembly. Process
metrology for emerging machining processes such as micro-scale machining, Inspection and work piece quality.
Unit-V: ASSEMBLY AND MATERIAL HANDLING

Assembly practices: Manufacturing and assembly, process planning, selective assembly, Material handling and
devices.
1. Taper turning and external thread cutting using lathe
2. Contour milling using vertical milling machine
3. Spur gear cutting in milling machine
4. Surface grinding
5. V-tool/parting tool grinding
6. Cylinder grinding
7. Use of Tool Maker’s Microscope
8. Sine bar and comparators
9. Surface finish measurement equipment
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Use of Autocollimator
12. Gear inspection using profile projector
Text Book(s):
1. Kalpakjian and Schmid, “Manufacturing processes for engineering materials”, Edition: 5, Pearson
India , 2014.
2. I.C Gupta, “Engineering Metrology”, Edition: 1, Dhanpatrai Publications , 2012.
Reference(s):
1. R.K Jain, “Engineering Metrology”, Edition: 1, Khanna Publishers , 2005.
2. D. Roy Marangoni, H. John Lienhard, G. Thomas Beckwith, “Mechanical Measurements”, Edition: 5,
Pearson Pvt Ltd , 2014.
3. G. Edward Hoffman, “Jig and Fixture Design”, Edition: 5, Delmar Learning , 2010.
L T P C
MEC18R448 : AUTOMATION IN MANUFACTURING
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Metal cutting Course Category: Program Core Courses
technology - MEC18R375 Course Type : Theory
1. To understand the importance of automation in the of field machine tool based manufacturing
2. To get the knowledge of various elements of manufacturing automation – CAD/CAM, sensors,
pneumatics, hydraulics and CNC
3. To understand the basics of product design and the role of manufacturing automation
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Explain the concepts of automation in the field of machine tool based manufacturing
CO2 Outline the basic fundamentals of CAD software
CO3 Apply the knowledge in computer aided manufacturing and CNC technology
CO4 Interpret the various strategies in low cost automation.
CO5 Contrast the basics of product design towards industrial application.

CO1 3 2 2 2 1 3
CO2 3 2 2 1 2 3 3
CO3 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 2 2 1 2 3
CO5 2 2 3 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I: INTRODUCTION TO AUTOMATION
Introduction: Why automation, Current trends, CAD, CAM, CIM; Rigid automation: Part handling, Machine
tools. Flexible automation: Computer control of Machine Tools and Machining Centers, NC and NC part
programming, Unigraphics, Solid works.
Unit-II: COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN

Computer Aided Design: Fundamentals of CAD - Hardware in CAD-Computer Graphics Software and Data Base,
Geometric modeling for downstream applications and analysis methods.
Unit-III: COMPUTER AIDED MANUFACTURING

Computer Aided Manufacturing: CNC technology, PLC, Micro-controllers, CNC- Adaptive Control, Automated
Material handling, Automated Guided Vehicles (AVG), Group Technology (GT), Computer Aided Process
Planning (CAPP).
Unit-IV: LOW COST AUTOMATION

Low cost automation: Mechanical & Electro mechanical Systems, Pneumatics and Hydraulics, Illustrative
Examples and case studies.
Unit-V: INTRODUCTION TO MODELING AND SIMULATION

Introduction to Modeling and Simulation: Product design, process route modeling, Optimization techniques, Case
studies & industrial applications.
Text Book(s):
1. P.Mikell Groover, “Automation, Production Systems, and Computer-integrated Manufacturing”,
Edition: 4, Prentice Hall , 2016.
2. Serope Kalpakjian and R.Steven Schmid, “Manufacturing – Engineering and Technology”, Edition: 7,
Pearson , 2013.
Reference(s):
1. YoramKoren, “Computer control of manufacturing system”, Edition: 1, McGraw Hill Education ,
2017.
2. Ibrahim Zeid, “CAD/CAM: Theory & Practice”, Edition: 2, McGraw Hill Education , 2009.
3. P.N.Rao, “CAD/CAM: Principles and applications”, Edition: 3, McGraw Hill Education , 2017.
MEC18R482 : MACHINE DRAWING PRACTICE L T P C

LABORATORY 1 0 3 2
Engineering Graphics & Design Course Type : Laboratory
To enable the students about modelling and assembly of machine components
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Demonstrate various drawing conventions, abbreviations and their usage
CO2 Apply the knowledge of dimensioning, fits and tolerance in industrial sectors
CO3 Draw various sectional views of any machine element
CO4 Understand the connecting principles of joints and bearings
CO5 Combine the various drawn parts of the component into assembled view

CO1 1 2 3 1 3 2 1
CO2 3 1 3 1 3 3 1 3 1 2
CO3 3 1 3 1 3 3 3 2
CO4 3 1 3 1 3 3 3 1 2
CO5 3 1 3 1 3 3 3 1 3
Experiments:
I. Machine Drawing Conventions:
a. Need for drawing conventions – Introduction to IS conventions
b. Title boxes, their size, location and details - common abbreviations & their liberal usage
c. Conventional representation of materials, common machine elements and parts such as screws, nuts,
bolts, keys, gears, webs, ribs.
d. Types of sections – selection of section planes and drawing of sections and auxiliary sectional views.
Parts not usually sectioned.
e. Methods of dimensioning, general rules for sizes and placement of dimensions for holes, centres,
curved and tapered features.
f. Fits and tolerance - allocation of fits for various mating parts - tolerance data sheet - tolerance table
preparation - Geometric tolerance
g. Types of Drawings – working drawings for machine parts.
II. Drawing of Machine Elements and simple parts

Selection of Views, additional views for the following machine elements and parts with every drawing
proportion.
a. Popular forms of Screw threads, bolts, nuts, stud bolts, tap bolts, set screws.
b. Keys, cottered joints and knuckle joint
c. Rivetted joints for plates
d. Shaft coupling, spigot and socket pipe joint
e. Journal, pivot and collar and foot step bearings
III. Assembly Drawings

Drawings of assembled views for the part drawings of the following using conventions and easy drawing
proportions.
a) Engine parts – stuffing boxes, cross heads, Eccentrics, Petrol Engine connecting rod, piston assembly.
b) Other machine parts - Screws jacks, Machine Vices Plummer block, Tailstock
c) Valves : Steam stop valve, spring loaded safety valve & feed check valve
NOTE: First angle projection to be adopted.
Reference(s):
1. Machine Drawing – R.K Dhawan, S.Chand Publications, 1998.
2. Machine Drawing –K.L.Narayana, P.Kannaiah & K. Venkata Reddy, New Age International Publishers,
2007.
MEC18R311 : NON-TRADITIONAL MACHINING L T P C

TECHNIQUES 3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: MEC18R152 - Course Category: Major Elective
The machining principles and processes in the manufacturing of precision components and products
that use in unconventional manufacturing environment. Basic understandings of the machining
capabilities of the processes, advantages, disadvantages
Course Outcome(s):
Outline the importance and list of advanced machining techniques and suitability of
CO1
mechanical energy based advanced machining process for the different materials.
CO2 Select the appropriate electrochemical machining process for the various materials.
CO3 Analyze the electrical energy based process for making complex profile in hard metals
Illustrate the Laser, Electron, Plasma and Ion beam machining processes, based on the
CO4
accuracy of the end product can choose the best machining process.
Apply the basic knowledge in micro-machining and Nano-machining processes and
CO5
hybridization of non-conventional machining processes.

CO1 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO3 2 2 2 1 3 1 2 2 2 2
CO4 2 2 3 2 1 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I: MECHANICAL ENERGY BASED MACHINING
Overview, need, classification of non-conventional machining processes –Abrasive water jet machining-
ultrasonic machining - principle, machining unit, tool materials, tool size, process characteristics, advantages,
limitations, applications. Abrasive flow machining - introduction, principle, equipment, process details,
advantages, limitations, and applications.
Unit-II: ELECTRO CHEMICAL MACHINING

Electro-chemical machining - introduction, principle, elements, machine, chemistry of process, metal removal
rate, tool design, accuracy, surface finish, economics, advantages, limitations, applications - electrochemical
grinding - electrochemical deburring, electrochemical honing, shaped tube electrolyte machining - chemical
machining - introduction, advantages, limitations, applications
Unit-III: ELECTRO THERMAL BASED MACHINING

Electrical Discharge Machining - introduction, principle, machine dielectric fluid, spark erosion generators,
EDM tools, electrode holders, tool design, flushing, process characteristics, applications, electrical discharge
grinding, wire cut EDM.
Unit-IV: THERMAL PROCESS

Plasma Arc Machining - introduction, principle, plasma, non-thermal generation of plasma, mechanism of
metal removal, PAM parameters, equipment, safety precautions, advantages, limitations, applications - Electron
Beam Machining, laser beam machining, Ion Beam Machining - introduction, principle, equipment, parameters,
characteristics, types of lasers.
Unit-V: HYBRID MACHINING

Hybridization of non-conventional processes and micro and nano-manufacturing ECDG, overview of micro and
nano- manufacturing and applications.
PRACTICAL COMPONENT (NOT FOR EXAMINATION)

Demo on operation of Electrical Discharge machining (EDM) and Abrasive water jet machining (AWJM).
Text Book(s):
1. V. K. Jain, “Advanced Machining Processes”, Edition: 1, Allied Publishers , 2009.
2. A. Helmi, Youssef, “Machining of Stainless Steels and Super Alloys: Traditional and Nontraditional
Techniques”, Edition: 1, John Wiley & Sons, 2016.
Reference(s):
1. Ghosh Amitabh, Malik Ashok, “Manufacturing Science”, Edition: 1, East West Press Pvt Ltd , 2010.
2. Hmt, Hmt, H M T, “Production Technology”, Edition: 1, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2001.
3. A. Lindberg Roy, “Processes and Materials of Manufacture”, Edition: 4, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi , 2006.
L T P C
MEC18R316 : THEORY OF METAL CUTTING
3 1 0 4
Pre-requisite: MEC18R375- Metal Course Category: Major Elective
Cutting Technology Course Type : Theory
To provide knowledge about the basics of metal cutting, chip formation and its Mechanism.
To understand the nomenclature of single point and multi point cutting tool.
To provide depth knowledge on various micromachining processes and also briefs the importance of
machining economics.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Describes the basic mechanism of metal cutting and chip formation.
CO2 Summarize the different aspects of single point cutting tools and their selection procedure.
CO3 Demonstrate the nomenclature and selection of multi point cutting tool.
CO4 Illustrate the concepts of micromachining process.
CO5 Analyze the concepts acquired to determine the machining time and product cost.

CO1 3 1 1 1 1 1 2
CO2 3 3 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3
CO4 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2
CO5 2 1 3 1 1 2 2
Course Topics:
Theory of metal cutting- chip formation- Types of chips-chip breaker-orthogonal Vs oblique cutting - specific
cutting energy - shear angle - theory of Merchant, Lee and Shaffer - friction in metal cutting - temperatures in
metal cutting - measurement of cutting temperature- Cutting fluids. Demo on Measurement of cutting temperature
using thermal image analyzer.
Unit-II: SINGLE POINT CUTTING TOOLS

Cutting tool material, properties, insert and coated tools, tool wear, tool life - single point cutting tool
nomenclature, type and styles- design and manufacture of tools - HSS and carbides-brazed and clamped insert
tools for turning, boring, shaping operations
Unit-III: MULTIPOINT CUTTERS

Multi-point cutters- nomenclature, classification and selection, construction methods, cutter setting, design and
manufacture of drills, reamers, taps, milling cutters, grinding wheel specification, lapping ,dressing and truing.
Unit-IV: MICROMACHINING AND CHATTER IN MACHINING

Theory of micromachining – chip formation - surface finish – Size effect in micromachining – microturning,
micromilling, microdrilling - tool design. Chatter in machining-factors effecting chatter in machining-types of
chatter-mechanism of chatter.
Unit-V: ECONOMICS OF MACHINING

Introduction to economics of machining, Machining Time- Estimation of machining time in different machining
operations, estimation of cost and optimum cutting conditions.
Text Book(s):
1. M.C. Shaw , “Metal cutting Principles”, Edition: 2, Oxford clarendon Press , 2004.
2. B. L. Juneja, “Fundamentals of metal cutting and machine tools”, Edition: 1, New Age International
, 2003.
Reference(s):
1. Mikell P. Groover, “Fundamentals of Modern Manufacturing: Materials, Processes, and Systems”,
Edition: 4, John Wiley & Sons , 2010.
2. W.A. Geoffrey Boothroyd and Knight, “Fundamentals of Machining and Machine tools”,
Edition: 2, CRC Press New York , 2008.
3. David A. Stephenson, John S. Agapiou, “Metal Cutting Theory and Practice”, Edition: 3, CRC Press
, 2000.
L T P C
MEC18R325 : WELDING TECHNOLOGY
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: MEC18R274-Thermal Course Category: Major Elective
Engineering Course Type : Theory
The aim of this course is to develop knowledge on joining process and skill to select processes based
on materials.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Select the appropriate welding processes and equipments to use in metal fabrication
CO2 Design a suitable equipment for heat transfer applications in welding
Identify the heat input and temperature distribution across a welded structure based on
CO3
weld geometry
CO4 Evaluate the causes of defects in welding of ferrous metals
Interpret the microstructures of welds, defects and remedies for a wide range in non-
CO5
ferrous alloys

CO1 3 2 1 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 2 3 1
CO3 3 2 1 1 2 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 2 1
CO5 3 2 2 1 2 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I: WELDING PROCESS AND EQUIPMENT’S
Welding processes and grouping, welding nomenclatures. Equipment’s, parameter controls, Electrode
specification and filler metals. Special welding process - Resistance welding, high energy density welding,
Thermit welding, and solid state welding
Unit-II: HEAT FLOW IN WELDING

Heat transfer in weldments, dissipation of welding heat, cooling rates and weld metal cooling curves. Calculation
of HAZ width, solidification rate and effects of heat input.
Unit-III: WELDING METALLURGY

Weld solidification, phase transformation in weldments, strengthening due to welding. Microstructures of HAZ,
PMZ, and fusion line. Weld cracking, residual stresses and distortion. Use of constitution diagram (Schaffler,
Delong, and WRC 92).
Unit-IV: WELDING OF FERROUS MATERIALS

Welding of Stainless steels, and cast irons – Welding procedure qualification, Microstructures of weldments,
electrode and filler material selection, defects and remedies, weldment properties, microstructure and defects
Unit-V: WELDING OF NON FERROUS MATERIALS

Welding of Aluminium, Nickel, and Titanium alloys - Welding procedure qualification, Microstructures of
weldments, electrode and filler material selection, defects and remedies
Text Book(s):
1. Howard B. Cary and Scott C. Helzer, “Modern Welding Technology”, Edition: 6, Pearson Prentice
Hall , 2011.
2. J. R. Davis, “Metals Handbook”, Edition: 2, Taylor & Francis , 1998.
Reference(s):
1. Cynthia L. Jenney, Annette O' Brien, “Welding Handbook, Vol. 1: Welding Science and Technology”,
Edition: 9, Woodhead Publishing Ltd , 2001.
2. J. F. Lancaster, “Metallurgy of Welding”, Edition: 6, Elsevier, , 1999.
MEC18R335 : RECENT TRENDS IN WELDING L T P C

TECHNIQUES 3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: MEC18R302- Course Category: Major Elective
Manufacturing Processes Course Type : Theory
The aim of undergoing this course is to develop knowledge on the trends and techniques in the
welding processes
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Classify the different welding process, its heat sources and shielding methods.
Outline the concepts and applications of various types of pressure welding and resistance
CO2
welding
CO3 Identify the advanced welding technique to use in metal fabrication.
Explain the concepts, various operating procedures and applications of soldering and
CO4
brazing.
CO5 Analyze the solidification behavior and structure of weld zone with the welding parameters

CO1 2 2 1 2
CO2 2 1 1 2
CO3 2 1 1 2 2
CO4 2 1 1 2
CO5 2 3 1 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I: FUSION WELDING
Classification of welding processes- heat sources and shielding methods –fusion welding processes- oxy -
acetylene welding, arc welding processes, electroslag and electrogas welding
Unit-II: PRESSURE WELDING AND RESISTANCE WELDING

Cold and hot pressure welding, friction, Solid state welding - friction stir, ultrasonic, induction pressure, explosive
and diffusion welding, Principles of resistance welding, Spot welding and Seam welding- cold metal transfer
welding.
Unit-III: NEWER WELDING TECHNIQUES

Electron beam, plasma arc and laser beam welding principles, advantages, limitations and applications of
the electron beam, plasma arc and laser beam welding processes, Welding Symbols.
Unit-IV: SOLDERING AND BRAZING

Soldering- soldering materials, applications of soldering- brazing, filler materials and fluxes, Visual and Oral
inspecting procedures.
Unit-V: WELDING METALLURGY

Weld thermal cycles and their effects- structural changes in different materials- effects of pre and post heat
treatments- concept of weldability and its assessment - Welding of different materials- defects in welds, their
causes and remedies
Text Book(s):
1. William A. Bowditch and Kevin E. Bowditch, “Welding Fundamentals”, Edition: 5, Goodheart-
Willcox Company, Incorporated , 2016.
2. J. F. Lancaster, “Metallurgy of Welding”, Edition: 6, Elsevier , 1999.
Reference(s):
1. Cynthia L. Jenney, Annette O' Brien, “Welding Handbook, Vol. 1: Welding Science and Technology”,
Edition: 9, Woodhead Publishing Ltd , 2001.
2. R W Messler, “Principles of Welding Processes”, Edition: 1, John Wiley & Sons, , 2008.
3. R S Parmar, “Welding Engineering and Technology”, Edition: 1, Khanna Publishers , 2004.
MEC18R336 : MECHANICAL BEHAVIOUR OF L T P C

MATERIALS 3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: MEC18R208- Materials Course Category: Major Elective
Science Course Type : Theory
The central theme of this course is the mechanical behaviour of engineering materials, such as metals,
ceramics, polymers, and composites. The main objectives are to provide students with basic
understanding of mechanical properties and testing of the materials and find out the suitability of the
materials for different applications.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Illustrate the elastic/plastic deformation and failure criteria
CO2 Apply dislocation theories for work hardening and strengthening mechanism
CO3 Outline the basic concepts involved in fatigue.
CO4 Dissect the behavior of material upon creep testing.
CO5 Examine the torsion testing of materials and understand the types of torsion failures.

CO1 3 2 2 2 2 3 2
CO2 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
CO3 3 2 2 2 2 1 2
CO4 3 2 1 2 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 2 2 1 2 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I: DEFORMATION
Elastic and plastic deformation -Stress-strain relationship, plastic deformation of metallic materials - Mohr's circle
- Yielding criterion - Von Mises and maximum shear stress, tresca yielding criterion Failure criteria under
combined stresses
Unit-II: THEORY OF PLASTICITY

Elements of theory of plasticity - dislocation theory, properties of dislocation, stress fields around dislocations,
elementary dislocation interactions - application of dislocation theory to work hardening and strengthening
mechanisms.
Unit-III: FATIGUE OF STRUCTURES

S.N. curves – Endurance limits – Effect of mean stress, Goodman, Gerber and Soderberg relations and diagrams
– Notches and stress concentrations – Neuber’s stress concentration factors – Plastic stress concentration factors
– Notched S.N. curves – Fatigue of composite materials.
Unit-IV: CREEP
Creep- importance in materials engineering – primary mechanisms of creep deformation – design options to
minimize creep deformation – stress rupture & stress relaxation tests, development of creep resistant alloys,
prediction of long time properties.
Unit-V: TORSION
Introduction - mechanical properties in torsion, torsional stresses for large plastic strains- types of torsion failures
- torsion test vs. tension test - hot torsion testing.
Text Book(s):
1. Thomas H. Courtney, “Mechanical Behavior of Materials”, Edition: 2, Waveland Press , 2005.
2. G. E. Dieter, “Mechanical Metallurgy”, Edition: 3, McGraw Hill Publications , 2017.
Reference(s):
1. Suryanarayana, “Testing of Metallic Materials”, Edition: 2, BS Publications , 2007.
2. R. M. Rose, L. A. Shepard and J. Wulff, “Structure and Properties of Materials Volume IV ”,
Edition: 1, John Wiley Eastern Pvt, Ltd, New Delhi 1968.
3. P.K. Mallicak, “Fiber-reinforced composites”, Edition: 3, CRC Press , 2007.
MEC18R337 : MANUFACTURING SYSTEM AND L T P C

SIMULATION 3 0 0 3
Course Category: Major Elective
Pre-requisite: Nil
To involve in integrated approach for the design of complex engineering systems
To provide knowledge of statistical techniques for engineering application
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Demonstrate a range of approaches in computer modelling and simulation.
CO2 Make use of different techniques of random number generation for diverse conditions.
CO3 Select a suitable technique of random variable generation for a specific problem.
CO4 Adapt appropriate distribution and evaluation methodology for simulation models. .
CO5 Identify apposite discrete event simulation concepts for a range of mechanical problems.

CO1 2 3 1 3 1 1 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 1 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 1 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 2 3 1 1 3 3 3 3
CO5 1 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I: COMPUTER MODELING AND SIMULATION SYSTEMS
Monte carlo simulation-nature of computer modelling and simulation - limitations of simulation, areas of
application - components of a system - discrete and continuous systems. models of a system - a variety of modeling
approaches-simulation languages arena and awesim
Unit-II: RANDOM NUMBER GENERATION

Techniques for generating random numbers - mid square method-the mid product method-constant multiplier
technique - additive congruential method - linear congruential method-tests for random numbers-the Kolmogorov-
Smirnov test-the Chi-Square test.
Unit-III: RANDOM VARIABLE GENERATION

Inverse transform technique-exponential distribution-uniform distribution - Weibull distribution - emprical
continuous distribution - generate approximate normal variates - Erlang distribution-basics of SPSS.
Unit-IV: DISTRIBUTION AND EVALUATION OF EXPERIMENTS

Discrete uniform distribution - poisson distribution - geometric distribution - acceptance rejection technique for
poisson distribution - gamma distribution - simulation experiments - variance reduction techniques - antithetic
variables - verification and validation of simulation models.
Unit-V: DISCRETE EVENT SIMULATION

Concepts in discrete event simulation, manual simulation using event scheduling, single channel queue, two
server queue simulation of inventory problems - programming for discrete event systems in GPSS-Case studies.
Text Book(s):
1. Jerry Banks and John S Carson, “Discrete – Event System Simulation”, Edition: 5, Prentice Hall Inc,
New Delhi , 2017.
2. G. Gordon, “Systems simulation”, Edition: 2, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New Delhi , 2016.
Reference(s):
1. Narsingdeo, “Systems simulation with digital computer”, Edition: 1, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New
Delhi , 2009.
2. Francis Neelamkovil, “Computer Simulation and Modeling”, Edition: 1, John Wiley and Sons , 2015.
3. M. D. Ruth, and M.O. Keefe, “Simulation and Modeling with Pascal”, Edition: 1, Prentice Hall Inc.,
New Delhi , 2015.
L T P C
MEC18R339 : TOOLING FOR PRODUCTION
3 1 0 4
To understand the basic concepts of machining mechanism used in manufacturing Industry and
Tools used for production Technology
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Illustrate the nomenclature of single and multipoint cutting tools.
CO2 Examine the factors affecting the machinability and machining economics.
Appraise the suitable tool pertaining to an application based on the tool life and machining
CO3
parameters.
CO4 Make use of the design principles of jigs and fixtures for its usage in specific applications.
Identify the types of presses for a variety of sheet metal operations based on the selection and
CO5
design factors.

CO1 2 2 2 1 1
CO2 2 2 3 2 1
CO3 1 3 1 2 1 2 1 2
CO4 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I: CUTTING TOOLS
Geometry of cutting tools and tool nomenclature - single point and multiple point cutting tools and used for
turning – milling - drilling and broaching - cutting tool materials and their properties - grinding wheels and their
selections
Unit-II: MACHINABILITY
machinability - variables affecting machinability - machinability index - economics of machining - selection of
optimal machining conditions - productivity of machine tools
Unit-III: TOOL LIFE

Tool wear and tool life- Types of tool wear, Factors affecting tool life tool life equations - tool life specification
and criteria - tool life testing -effect of machining parameters on tool life.
Unit-IV: JIGS AND FIXTURES

Basic principle - elements of jigs and fixtures - location and clamping - 3-2-1 method of location-principles of
pin location - radial location - V-location - cavity location - types of clamps - strap - cam - screw - latch – wedge
and toggle clamps- hydraulic and pneumatic clamps - design considerations common to jigs and fixtures - drill
jigs – leaf – box - plate and indexing jigs - milling fixtures.
Unit-V: PRESS WORKING

Different types of presses - principles of operation and selection - computation of capacities and tonnage
requirements - shear action in die cutting operations - blanking and piercing – clearances - die block design -
punch dimensions- punch support - stops and strippers - calculation of blank size and press tonnage for
drawing.
Text Book(s):
1. Boothroyd, “Fundamentals of Metal Machining and Machine Tools”, Edition: 3, Taylor and Francis ,
2005.
2. Sen and Bhattacharya, “Metal cutting Theory and Practice”, Edition: 2, New central book
agency,Calcutta , 2000.
Reference(s):
1. Ranganath, B.J, “Metal Cutting and Tool Design”, Edition: 2, Vikas Publishing House , 1999.
2. Sharma, P.C, “A text book of Production Engineering”, Edition: 11, S Chand publishing , 1999.
3. Hmt, Hmt, H M T Bangalore, “Production Technology”, Edition: 1, Tata McGraw-Hill Education ,
2017.
L T P C
MEC18R340 : COMPOSITE MATERIALS
3 1 0 4
Pre-requisite: MEC18R208-Materials Course Category: Major Elective
To understand the basic principle of composite materials with some of the fabrication process ,testing
and failure analysis of composite materials applications.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Define the composite materials over conventional materials and its applications.
Interpret the differences in the laminate processes and its corresponding effect on
CO2
performance of the composite materials.
CO3 Make use of major manufacturing processes and to study the quality of the products.
Classify the various mechanical properties and appropriate test methods used incomposites
CO4
materials.
Examine the failure modes of the composites laminates and with Finite Element Method to
CO5
analysis the failure.

CO1 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 3
CO2 3 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 1
CO3 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 2
CO4 2 1 2 1 3 1 2 1 3 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 3
Course Topics:
Unit-I: INTRODUCTION TO COMPOSITE
Definition and applications of composite materials, Fibers- glass, carbon, ceramic and aramid fibers; Matrices-
polymer, graphite, ceramic and metal matrices; characteristics of fibers and matrices. Lamina- assumptions,
macroscopic viewpoint, generalized Hooke’s law, reduction of homogeneous orthotropic lamina, isotropic limit
case, orthotropic stiffness matrix, commercial material properties, rule of mixtures, transformation matrix,
transformed stiffness.
Unit-II: LAMINATE PROCESSES

Basic assumptions of laminated anisotropic plates, symmetric laminates, angle ply laminates, cross ply laminates,
laminate structural moduli, evaluation of lamina properties, determination of lamina stresses, maximum stress and
strain criteria, von Mises Yield criterion for isotropic materials, generalized Hill’s criterion for anisotropic
materials, TsaiHill’s criterion for composites, prediction of laminate failure, thermal analysis of composite
laminates.
Unit-III: FABRICATION PROCESSES

Fundamentals - bag moulding - compression moulding, pultrusion-filament winding - other manufacturing
process - quality inspection and non-destructive testing.
Unit-IV: TESTING OF COMPOSITES

Introduction to micro-mechanics-unidirectional lamina - laminates – inter-laminar stresses - static mechanical
properties - fatigue properties - impact properties - environmental effects - fracture mechanics and toughening
mechanisms, damage prediction, failure modes.
Unit-V: FAILURE PREDICTIONS

Failure predictions - design considerations - joint design - codes - design examples - optimization of laminated
composites - application of FEM for design and analysis of laminated composites.
Text Book(s):
1. R. F. Gibson, “Principles of Composite Material Mechanics”, Edition: 3, McGraw Hill , 2011.
2. Ronald Gibson, “Principles of Composite Material Mechanics”, Edition: 4, CRC Press , 2016.
Reference(s):
1. B. D. Agarwal and L. J. Broutman , “Analysis and Performance of Fiber Composites”, Edition: 4,
John Wiley and Sons, New York , 1980.
2. Autar K. Kaw, “Mechanics of Composite Materials”, Edition: 2, Taylor & Francis-India , 2006.
3. Krishnan K. Chawla Composite materials science and engineering”, Edition: 2, Springer Publications
, 2012.
MEC18R343 : HEAT TREATMENT AND SURFACE L T P C

TREATING 3 1 0 4
The aim of this course is to understand the topics of heat treatment process and function of furnace
along materials nature of ferrous and non-ferrous materials.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Outline the knowledge on heat treatment and its phase transformations.
CO2 Explain the heat treatment process for different ferrous alloy.
CO3 Illustrate the heat treatment process for different nonferrous alloy.
CO4 Explain the various surface and special treatment processes.
CO5 Apply the heat treatment process for engineering components.

CO1 1 1
CO2 1 1 1 2 2
CO3 2 1 1 2 2
CO4 2 3 2 3 2
CO5 3 3 2 3 3
Course Topics:
Unit-I: HEAT TREATMENT ATMOSPHERE AND PRINCIPLES
Furnaces and heat treatment atmosphere, quenching media, fixtures, temperature measurements and controllers.
Phase transformations – Austenitic, Pearlitic, bainitic, martensitic transformations.
Unit-II: HEAT TREATMENT OF FERROUS ALLOYS

Heat treatment of steels - stainless steels, Tool steels, Maraging steels, HSLA steels, and cast irons – processes,
heat treatment defects, causes, remedies, inspections and quality control.
Unit-III: HEAT TREATMENT OF NON FERROUS ALLOYS

Heat treating of Aluminium, copper, nickel, titanium and magnesium alloys – processes, heat treatment defects,
causes, remedies, inspections and quality control
Unit-IV: SURFACE AND SPECIAL TREATMENT

Ferritc nitro carburizing, Laser refractive surgery., PVD and CVD process, sputter coating, ion plating, electron
beam and laser beam hardening, ion implantation, spray coatings, thermo-mechanical treatments – mechanisms,
structural changes, and property relations.
Unit-V: HEAT TREATMENT OF ENGINEERED COMPONENTS

Heat treatment of wrought steel components – auto body sheets, plates, bars, and shafts. Heat treatment of cast
and forged steel components – gears, couplings, and valves - Heat treatment procedure qualification.
Text Book(s):
1. T. V. Rajan and C. P. Sharma, “Heat treatment-Principles and Techniques”, Edition: 2, PHI Learning
Pvt Ltd , 2011.
2. American Society of Metals, “Metals hand book, Vol. IV”, Edition: 1, ASM Metal park Ohio, USA ,
1991.
Reference(s):
1. Karl Eric Thelning, “Steel and its Heat treatment”, Edition: 2, Butterworth-Heinemann Publications ,
2013.
2. T. S. Sudharsan, “Surface Engineering”, Edition: 1, Ohio State University , 1992.
L T P C
MEC18R421 : NON DESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION
3 1 0 4
By the end of this course the participants will be familiar with a wide variety of Non-destructive
testing techniques applicable to Design, Manufacturing and Industrial domains. The participants will
be able to know how each technique works, how they can apply it, when and where it can be used and
each technique's capabilities and limitations.
Course Outcome(s):
Connect the usage of Non-Destructive Examination in minimizing the cost over preferring
CO1
conventional destructive testing
CO2 Illustrate the principles of operation of liquid penetrant and magnetic particle tests.
Identify the method of finding internal defects and other properties through radiography
CO3
techniques.
Examine the application of ultrasonic and acoustic emission techniques in a real time
CO4
environment.
CO5 Illustrate the advancements in nondestructive testing methods and equipment’s.

CO1 3 2 2 1 1 3 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 3 1 1 3 2
CO3 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 1 2 3 3
CO4 3 2 2 2 1 3 1 1 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 1 3 1 1 1 3 3
Course Topics:
Unit-I: INTRODUCTION NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING AND LIQUID
PENETRANT
Basic Principles of non-destructive testing – technical backgrounds – destructive and non-destructive testing
comparisons-statistical measures and tools - process capability - theory of probability - sampling - ABC
standard- Characteristics of liquid penetrants - different washable systems - developers - applications
Unit-II: MAGNETIC PARTICLE TESTS

Methods of production of magnetic fields - principles of operation of magnetic particle test - applications -
advantages and limitations-Eddy current testing
Unit-III: RADIO GRAPH

Sources of ray - X-ray production - properties of X–rays - film characteristics - exposure charts - contrasts -
operational characteristics of X-ray equipment - applications.
Unit-IV: ULTRASONIC AND ACOUSTIC EMISSION TECHNIQUES

Production of ultrasonic waves - different types of waves - general characteristics of waves - pulse echo method
- A, B, C scans - principles of acoustic emission techniques - advantages and limitations - instrumentation -
applications
Unit-V: ADVANCES IN NDT AND EQUIPMENTS

Inspection management - conventional non destructive testing - pre and post weld - heat treatment - pressure
testing - vessel inspection - sub-sea inspection - long range ultrasonics - tube inspection- personnel resourcing
ultrasonic immersion inspection systems - analytical equipment - lab scanners, profilometers, gas analyzers and
leak detectors - industrial X-ray systems, exposure cabinets, X-ray tubes - magnetic particle and fluorescent
penetrant inspection - optical inspection systems - mass spectrometers - UV inspection – Thermography-
Principles-Phased array UT technique.
Text Book(s):
1. Barry Hull and Vernon John, “Non Destructive Testing”, Edition: , MacMillan , 1988.
2. Knud G. Boving NDE Handbook: Non-Destructive Examination Methods for Condition Monitoring”,
Edition: 1, Elsevier , 2014
Reference(s):
1. H. Dos Reis, “Non-Destructive Testing And Evaluation For Manufacturing And Construction.”,
Edition: 1, CRC Press , 1989.
2. Harold Berger, “Nondestructive Testing Standards: A Review”, Edition: 1, ASTM International , 2017.
3. Paul E. Mix, “Introduction to Nondestructive Testing: A Training Guide”, Edition: 2, John Wiley &
Sons , 2005.
L T P C
MEC18R431 : MICRO MANUFACTURING
3 1 0 4
Manufacturing Technology Course Type : Theory
To understand the micro level machining processes their applications.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Associate various mechanical energy based micro machining processes
CO2 Describe various beam energy based micro machining processes.
CO3 Illustrate various Nano level finishing processes and associated practices.
CO4 Infer micro level process for welding and forming of materials.
Implement various micro machining process for development and inspection of the
CO5
mechanical components.

CO1 3 2 2 3 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 3 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 1 3 2
CO4 3 1 2 1 2 2
CO5 3 2 3 2 2 2 1 3 3 3
Course Topics:
Unit-I: MICRO MACHINING I
Mechanical Micro machining – Ultra Sonic Micro Machining – Abrasive Jet Micro Machining – Water Jet
Machining – Abrasive Water Jet Micro Machining - Micro turning – Chemical and Electrical Chemical Micro
Machining – Electrical discharge micro machining.
Unit-II: MICRO MACHINING II

Beam Energy based micro machining – Electron Beam Micro Machining – Laser Beam Micro Machining – Laser
Beam Micro Machining – Electric Discharge Micro Machining – Ion Beam Micro Machining – Plasma Beam
Micro Machining –Hybrid Micro machining – Electro Discharge Grinding – Electro Chemical spark micro
machining – Electrolytic in process Dressing.
Unit-III: NANO POLISHING

Abrasive Flow finishing – Magnetic Abrasive Finishing – Magneto rheological finishing – Magneto Rheological
abrasive flow finishing – Magnetic Float polishing – Elastic Emission Machining – chemo mechanical Polishing.
Unit-IV: MICRO FORMING AND WELDING

Micro extrusion – Micro and Nano structural development by Nano Plastic forming and Roller Imprinting –
Micro bending with LASER – LASER micro welding – Electron beam for micro welding
Unit-V: RECENT TRENDS AND APPLICATIONS

Metrology for micro machined components – Ductile regime machining – AE based tool wear compensation –
Machining of Micro gear, micro nozzle, micro pins – Application.
Text Book(s):
1. V. K. Jain, “Micro Manufacturing Processes”, Edition: 1, CRC Press, Taylor & Francis , 2017.
2. H. Janocha , “Actuators – Basics and applications”, Edition: 1, Springer publishers , 2010.
Reference(s):
1. V. K. Jain, “Introduction to Micro machining”, Edition: 2, Narosa Publishing House , 2018.
2. BharatBhushan, “Handbook of nanotechnology”, Edition: 4, springer , 2018.
3. V. K. Jain, “Advanced Machining Processes”, Edition: 1, Allied Publishers, Delhi , 2007.
L T P C
MEC18R326:SOLID MECHANICS
3 1 0 4
Pre-requisite:MEC18R271- Strength of Course Category:Major Elective
Materials Course Type :Theory
The objective is to present the mathematical and physical principles in understanding the linear
continuum behavior of solids.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Explain the basic concepts of Stress and Strains
CO2 Interpret the idea of stress and strain in mechanical properties
CO3 Demonstrate mathematically for mechanical properties of material
CO4 Apply mathematical evaluation of real to solid geometrises
CO5 Comprehend the mechanical properties with energy and plasticity

CO1 2 3 1 1 3 2
CO2 3 3 1 3 2
CO3 3 3 3
CO4 3 2 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 2 1 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I:CONCEPTS OF STRESS AND STRAINS
Introduction to Cartesian tensors, Strains: Concept of strain, derivation of small strain tensor and compatibility,
Stress: Derivation of Cauchy relations and equilibrium and symmetry equations, principal stresses and
directions
Unit-II:MECHANICAL PROPERTIES AND GOVERNING LAWS

Constitutive equations: Generalized Hooke’s law, Linear elasticity, Material symmetry Boundary Value
Problems: concepts of uniqueness and superposition.
Unit-III:ANALYSIS OF STRESS AND STRAIN IN VARIOUS COORDINATES

Plane stress and plane strain problems, introduction to governing equations in cylindrical and spherical
coordinates, axisymmetric problems.
Unit-IV:APPLICATIONS OF MECHANICAL BEHAVIOR OF MATERIALS

Application to thick cylinders, rotating discs, torsion of non-circular cross-sections, stress Concentration
problems, thermo-elasticity, 2-d contact problems.
Unit-V:ENERGY AND PLASTICITY

Solutions using potentials. Energy methods. Introduction to plasticity.
Text Book(s):
1. G. T. Mase, R. E. Smelser and G. E. Mase, “Continuum Mechanics for Engineers”, Edition:3 ,CRC Press
,2004.
2. Y. C. Fung, “Foundations of Solid Mechanics”, Edition:2, Prentice Hall International,1965.
Reference(s):
1. Lawrence. E. Malvern “Introduction to Mechanics of a Continuous Medium”, Edition:1, Prentice Hall
International,1969.
2. Crandall, S, N. Dahl, and T. Lardner, “An Intro. to the Mechanics of Solids”, Edition:2, McGraw-Hill,1978.
3. GereJames, “Mechanics of Materials”, Edition:6, ,Thomson Engineering Publishing,2003.
L T P C
MEC18R306:COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite:MEC18R151- Course Category:Major Elective
Engineering graphics & design Course Type :Theory
The aim of undergoing this course is to impart knowledge on computer graphics which are used
routinely in diverse areas as science, engineering, etc..
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Analyze of the fundamental of the computer graphics.
CO2 Explain the main curve representations and determine their differential properties.
CO3 Construct parametric and feature models of solid models.
Interpret picture data fed into a computer and for creating pictures from difficult
CO4
multidimensional data sets.
CO5 Apply assembly models and fits.

CO1 3 1 3 1 2 1 1 2 1 2
CO2 3 1 3 2 2 1 1 2 1 2
CO3 3 1 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2
CO4 3 2 3 3 3 1 1 2 2 1 2
CO5 3 2 3 2 3 1 1 2 2 1 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I:INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER GRAPHICS FUNDAMENTALS
Fundamentals of Computer Graphics- Product cycle, sequential and concurrent engineering, Computer Aided
Design, Outputs primitives (points, lines, curves etc.,), 2-D & 3-D transformation (Translation, scaling, rotators)
windowing – view ports – clipping transformation.
Unit-II:CURVES AND SURFACES MODELLING

Introduction to curves, Geometric Modeling – Analytical curves: line, circle and conics –synthetic curves:
Hermite cubic spline- Bezier curve and B-Spline curve – curve manipulations. Introduction to surfaces –
Analytical surfaces: Plane surface, ruled surface, surface of revolution and tabulated cylinder – synthetic
surfaces: Hermite bicubic surface – Bezier surface and B-Spline surface- surface manipulations.
Unit-III:NURBS AND SOLID MODELING

Basics-curves, linear, areas, circle and bi linear surface. Regularized Boolean set operations – primitive
instancing – sweep representations – boundary representations – constructive solid Geometry – comparison of
representations – user interface for solid modeling.
Unit-IV:VISUAL REALISM
Hidden – Line – Surface – solid removal algorithms shading – coloring, computer animation. Introduction to
parametric and variation geometry based software’s and their principles creation of prismatic and lofted parts
using these packages.
Unit-V:ASSEMBLY OF PARTS AND PRODUCT DATA EXCHANGE

Assembly of parts- assembly modeling, interferences of positions and orientation, tolerance analysis, mass
property calculations, mechanism simulation and interference checking. Graphics and computing standards-
Open GL, Data exchange standards- IGES, STEP, CALS etc., and Communication standards.
Text Book(s):
1. Donald Hearn and M.Pauline Baker, “Computer Graphics C version”, Edition:2 ,Pearson Education ,2002.
2. Ibrahim Zeid, “Mastering CAD/CAM”, Edition:2,McGraw Hill Education,2016.
Reference(s):
1. William M Neumann and Robart F.Sproul “Principles of Computer Graphics”, Edition:1 Mc Graw
HillBook Co. Singapore, ,2017.
2. Foley, Wan Dam, Feiner and Hughes, “Computer graphics principles & practices”, Edition:2,Pearson
Education,2013.
3. M. Groover, “CAD/CAM”, Edition:1,Pearson Education,2003.
MEC18R309:DESIGN OF JIGS, FIXTURES AND PRESS L T P C

TOOLS 3 0 0 3
• To provide basic knowledge jigs and fixtures and its need for various applications
• To provide the knowledge in design of jigs and fixtures for various components and machines
• To familiarize in press working terminology and selection of dies for press working
operation
• To equip the students in designing the dies for the various press work operations
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Demonstrate the purpose and functions of jigs and fixtures.
CO2 : Design and develop jigs and also jig-less manufacturing.
CO3 Explain various fixture assemblies, design, develop and inspect fixtures.
CO4 Analyze the press working and strip layout process.
Evaluate the design and development of progressive and compound dies for various
CO5
applications...

CO1 3 2 1 3 3 2
CO2 3 2 3 2 2 3 2
CO3 3 2 3 2 3 2
CO4 3 2 3 2 2 2 1 3 2
CO5 3 2 3 1 3 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I:PURPOSE, TYPES AND FUNCTIONS OF JIGS AND FIXTURES
Tool design objectives - production devices - inspection devices - materials used in jigs and fixtures – types of
jigs - types of fixtures - mechanical actuation - pneumatic and hydraulic actuation-analysis of clamping force-
tolerance and error analysis.
Unit-II:JIGS
Drill bushes – different types of jigs - plate latch, channel, box, post, angle plate, angular post, turnover, pot jigs
- automatic drill jigs - rack and pinion operated - air operated jigs components - design and development of jigs
for given components – Jigless manufacturing concept
Unit-III:FIXTURES
General principles of - boring, lathe, milling, broaching, grinding, planning and shaping fixtures - assembly -
inspection and welding fixtures - modular fixtures - design and development of fixtures for given component.
Unit-IV:PRESS WORKING
General principles of - boring, lathe, milling, broaching, grinding, planning and shaping fixtures - assembly -
inspection and welding fixtures - modular fixtures - design and development of fixtures for given component.
Unit-V:DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT OF DIES

Design and development of progressive and compound dies for blanking and piercing operations - bending dies
– development of bending dies, forming and drawing dies -development of drawing dies.
Text Book(s):
1. Edward, G., Hoffman, “Jigs and Fixture Design”, Edition:5 ,Cengage India,2008.
2. 2. Joshi, P.H, “Jigs and Fixtures”, Edition:2,Tata McGraw-Hill Education Pvt Ltd,2010.
Reference(s):
1. Cyril Donaldson , George H. Lecain , VC Goold, “Tool Design”, Edition:4 McGraw Hill Education, ,2012.
2. Franklin D Jones M D, “Jig and Fixture Design”, Edition:1,Forgotten Books2018.
3. H. Gerling , “All About Machine Tools”, Edition:1,New Age International Private Limited,2006.
L T P C
MEC18R315 : DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURING
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: MEC18R152
To enable the students to understand the principles of manufacturability and factors to be considered
for the various manufacturing process
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Outline the design features to be considered for manufacturing process
CO2 Identify the influence of materials on form design
CO3 Facilitate the design features of machining processes
CO4 Analyze and design the cast components
CO5 Evaluate the quality of component design

CO1 2
CO2 3 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 2
CO5 1 2 3 2 2
Course Topics:
General design - principles for manufacturability, strength and mechanical factors, mechanisms selection,
evaluation method - process capability - feature tolerances - geometric tolerances - assembly limits – datum
features - tolerance stacks
Unit-II: FACTORS INFLUENCING FORM DESIGN

Working principle - material, manufacture, design - possible solutions - materials choice- influence of materials
on form design of welded members, forgings and castings.
Unit-III: COMPONENT DESIGN –MACHINING CONSIDERATION

Design features to facilitate machining - drills, milling cutters, keyways - doweling procedures - counter sunk
screws - reduction of machined area - simplification by separation - simplification by amalgamation –design for
fixtures- design for machinability - design for economy - design for clampability - design for accessibility -
design for assembly.
Unit-IV: COMPONENT DESIGN – CASTING CONSIDERATIONS

Redesign of castings based on parting line considerations - minimizing core requirements, machined holes,
redesign of cast members to obviate cores
Unit-V: REDESIGN FOR MANUFACTURE AND CASE STUDIES

Identification of uneconomical design - modifying the design - group technology - computer applications for
DFMA.
Text Book(s):
1. Harry Peck, “Design for Manufacture”, Edition: 1, Pittman Publication , 1983.
2. Robert Matousek, “Engineering Design - A systematic approach”, Edition: 3, Blackie and sons Ltd , 2007.
Reference(s):
1. James G. Bralla, “Hand Book of Product Design for Manufacturing”, Edition: 2, McGraw Hill Co , 1998.
2. K.G. Swift, “Knowledge based design for manufacture”, Edition: 1, Prentice-Hall , 1987.
3. Corrado Poli, “Design for Manufacturing”, Edition: 1, Elsevier , 2001.
L T P C
MEC18R341:PRINCIPLES OF COMPONENT DESIGN
3 1 0 4
Pre-requisite:MEC18R151- Engineering Course Category:Major Elective
graphics & design Course Type :Theory
The aim of undergoing this course is to develop knowledge on the principles of designing a
mechanical component.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Understanding various processes pertaining to product design.
CO2 Develop basic and advanced designing and prototyping skills.
CO3 Apply modeling and simulation skills in product modeling and optimize design.
CO4 Select suitable material and process for most economic manufacturing.
CO5 Analyze the design based on the quality concept.

CO1 2 2 2 2
CO2 1 1 2 1 2
CO3 2 1 2
CO4 1 1 2 1 1
CO5 2 1 2 1 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I:PRODUCT DESIGN PROCESS
The design process - morphology of design - design drawings - computer aided engineering - designing of
standards - concurrent engineering – product life cycle - technological forecasting – market identification
competition bench marking - systems engineering - life cycle engineering - human factors in design industrial
design.
Unit-II:CONCEPTUAL DESIGN
Creativity and problem solving - product design specifications - conceptual design - decision theory
embodiment design - detail design. Rapid prototyping methods- Clay models, Computer Numerically Controlled
(CNC) models, SLA/SLS.
Unit-III:MODELLING AND OPTIMIZATION

Mathematical modelling - simulation - geometric modelling - finite element modelling – Data Modelling -
optimization - search methods - geometric programming - structural and shape optimization.
Unit-IV:MATERIAL SELECTION AND DESIGN FOR ASSEMBLY

Material selection process - economics - cost vs performance - weighted property index - value analysis role of
processing and design - classification of manufacturing processes - design for manufacture - design for
assembly- consideration in design of assembly and manufacture - design for castings, forging, metal forming,
machining and welding - residual stresses – fatigue.
Unit-V:QUALITY IN DESIGN
Total quality concept - quality assurance – quality tool-QFD-statistics process control - Taguchi methods -
robust design - failure model effect analysis- fool proof system-poka yoke analysis.
Text Book(s):
1. Dieter George, “Product Design and Development”, Edition:5 ,McGraw Hill,2011.

2. Karl T. Ulrich, and Steven D. Eppinger, “Jigs and Fixtures”, Edition:2,Tata McGraw-Hill Education Pvt
Ltd,2010.
Reference(s):
1. Richard G. budynas and Keith J. Nisbett, “Mechanical Engineering Design”, Edition:10 McGraw Hill
,2014.
2. Franklin D Jones M D, “Jig and Fixture Design”, Edition:1,Forgotten Books2018.
3. John R. Karsnitz, Stephen O'Brien, John P. Hutchinson., “Engineering Design-An Introduction”,
Edition:1,Delmar Cengage Learning,2013.
MEC18R434:DESIGN OF MATERIAL HANDLING L T P C

EQUIPMENTS 3 1 0 4
Course Category:Major Elective
Pre-requisite:NIL
Course Type :Theory
The aim of undergoing this course is to develop basic understanding the topics principle management
and entrepreneurship development.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Enumerate various material handling equipment’s and their applications in industries.
CO2 Design a wide range of hoist systems and its safety elements.
CO3 Compare different drives for hoisting gears and conveyers for engineering applications.
CO4 Enumerate the systems involved in automated guided vehicles.
CO5 Interpret a variety of systems of elevators and its design.

CO1 1 2
CO2 1 1 3 2
CO3 1 3 2
CO4 2 1 1
CO5 2 3 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I:INTRODUCTION TO MATERIALS HANDLING EQUIPMENTS
Types, selection and applications of material handling systems, principal groups of material handling
equipments and classifications, scope of material handling, criteria for selection of material handling
equipments, various material handling problems
Unit-II:DESIGN OF HOISTS
Design of hoisting elements; Welded and roller chains - Hemp and ropes – Design of ropes, pulleys, pulleys
systems, sprockets and drums, Load handling attachments. Design of forged hooks and eye hooks – crane grabs
– lifting magnets – Grabbing attachments – Design of arresting gear – Brakes: shoe, band and cone types.
Unit-III:DRIVES OF HOISTING GEAR AND CONVEYERS

Hand and power drives - Traveling gear - Rail traveling mechanism – cantilever and monorail cranes – slewing,
jib and luffing gear – cogwheel drive – selecting the motor ratings – Types – description – design and
applications of Belt conveyers, apron conveyors and escalators pneumatic conveyors, screw conveyors and
vibratory conveyers.
Unit-IV:AUTOMATED GUIDED VEHICLE SYSTEM

Types of vehicles and AGVs applications – Vehicle guidance technology – Vehicle management and safety.
Storage system performance – storage location strategies – Conventional storage methods and equipments –
Automated storage/Retrieval system and Carousel storage system. Deadlocks in Automated manufacturing
systems - Petrinet models – Applications in dead lock avoidance- Hurwicz criterion-Expected Monetary Value
criterion-Expected Value of Perfect Information (E.V.P. I.)
Unit-V:ELEVATORS
Bucket elevators: design – loading and bucket arrangements – Cage elevators – shaft way, guides, counter
weights, hoisting machine, safety devices – Design of fork lift trucks.
Text Book(s):
1. Rudenko.N, “Materials handling equipment”, Edition:2 ,Central Books Ltd,1970.
2. Spivakovsy.A.O and Dyachkov.V.K, “Conveying Machines,”, Edition:2, MIR publishers,1985.
Reference(s):
1. Günter Ullrich and Paul A. KachurAutomated Guided Vehicle Systems: A Primer with Practical
Applications”, Edition:1,Springer,2015.
2. Ronald G. Askin , Charles R. Standridge, “Modeling and Analysis of Manufacturing Systems”,
Edition:1,John Wiley & Sons,1993.
3. Alxandrov.M, “Materials Handling Equipments”, Edition:1,MIR Publishers,,1981.
L T P C
MEC18R312:INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite:Thermal Engineering
Course Type :Theory
The aim of undergoing this course is to develop basic understanding on working of SI and CI engines
and their performance and knowledge on emission control.
Course Outcome(s):
Distinguish various components of IC engines and analyze the key factors influencing
CO1
engine performance
CO2 Analyze the performance of compression ignition engine using fuel injection characteristics
CO3 Identify the sources and types of pollutants in IC engines
CO4 Elaborate the methods and measurement of emission controls
Evaluate the suitability of alternate fuels for IC engines and measurement techniques for
CO5
advancement in IC Engines

CO1 1 3 2 3 2 3 2
CO2 1 3 3 3 2 3 2
CO3 3 1 2 3 2
CO4 1 2 1 1 2 1
CO5 3 1 1 2 3 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I:SPARK IGNITION ENGINE
Air Fuel cycles, Ideal Cycles, Spark ignition engine mixture requirements, feedback control, carburetors, fuel
injection systems – mono point and multipoint injection, stages of combustion - normal and abnormal
combustion - factors affecting knock, combustion chambers - introduction to thermodynamic analysis of SI
engine combustion- reason for ignition and ignition advance.
Unit-II:COMPRESSION IGNITION ENGINE
Stages of combustion in CI engine, direct and indirect injection systems, combustion chambers, fuel spray
behaviour, spray structure, spray penetration and evaporation - air motion, turbo charging, introduction to
thermodynamic analysis of CI engine combustion–recent trends in injection system- Port fuel injection, Direct
injection and Common rail injection. Cooling & Lubrication System for IC Engines
Unit-III:POLLUTANTS
Pollutants - sources and types, formation of NOx, hydrocarbon emission mechanism, carbon monoxide
formation.
Unit-IV:EMISSION CONTROL
Particulate emissions - methods of controlling emissions- catalytic converters and particulate traps, methods of
measurements and driving cycles- engine modification to reduce emission, Testing of IC Engines
Unit-V:ALTERNATE FUELS
Duel fuel, natural fuel and wankel rotary engine- free piston engine-alcohol, hydrogen, natural gas and
Liquefied Petroleum Gas - properties, suitability, engine modifications, merits and demerits as fuels, lean burn
engines, stratified charge engines, gasoline direct injection engine, homogeneous charge compression ignition,
plasma ignition , measurement techniques.
Text Book(s):
1. John B Heywood, “Internal Combustion Engine Fundamentals”, Edition:1,McGraw Hill,2017.
2. R.P.Mathur and M.L.Sharma, “Internal Combustion Engines”, Edition:2,Dhanpatrai Publishers,2014.
Reference(s):
1. V.Ganesan, “Internal Combustion Engines”, Edition:4,McGraw-Hill Education,2012.
2. Rowland S Benson and Whitehouse, “Internal combustion Engines, Volume I and II”,
Edition:1,Pergamon Press,1983.
3. Duffy Smith and Howard Smith, “Auto fuel Systems”, Edition:1,Good heart-Wilcox Publisher,1987.
L T P C
MEC18R313:TURBO MACHINERY
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite:Thermodynamics
Course Type :Theory
Enable the students to understand the concepts and working of turbo machinery.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Explain the fundamentals of turbo machines.
CO2 Design of fans and blowers.
CO3 Examine the Performance of centrifugal compressors.
Demonstrate the construction of axial compressors and solve simple performance
CO4
calculations.
CO5 Compare and discuss the performances and characteristics of axial and radial flow turbines

CO1 3 1 2 2 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 3 2
CO3 3 2 2 3 2
CO4 3 3 2 3 2
CO5 3 3 2 2 3 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I:INTRODUCTION
Stages of turbo machines – energy transfer between fluid and rotor, stage velocity triangles, thermal turbo
machines, classification, general energy equation, modified turbo machines, compression and expansion
process.
Unit-II:FAN AND BLOWERS

Fan, blowers – blade design, velocity triangles, stage parameters, flow analysis in impeller blades, design
parameter, volute and diffusers, efficiencies and losses, fan noises, causes and remedial measures.
Unit-III:CENTRIFUGAL FLOW COMPRESSORS

Centrifugal compressors - definition and classifications, stage parameters, performance characteristics
- cascade of blades, cascade tunnel, blade geometry, cascade variables, energy transfer and loss in terms of lift
and drag.
Unit-IV:AXIAL FLOW COMPRESSORS

Axial flow compressors - definition and classifications, constructional details, stage velocity triangles,
stage work, stage pressure rise, H-S diagram, stage efficiencies and losses, degree of reaction, radial
equilibrium, surging and stalling, performance characteristics.
Unit-V:AXIAL AND RADIAL FLOW TURBINES

Axial and radial flow turbines - construction details, 90° IFR turbine, stage work, stage velocity triangles, stage
pressure rise, impulse and reaction stage, effect of degree of reaction, H-S diagram, efficiencies and losses,
performance characteristics.
Text Book(s):
1. S. M. Yahya, “Turbines”, Edition:4,Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing,2017.
2. S. L. Dixon, “Fluid Mechanics and Thermodynamics of Turbomachinery”, Edition:7,Elsevier,2014.
Reference(s):
1. V.Kadambi, “An Introduction to energy conversion”, Edition:2,New Age International,2011.
2. A. Korpela, “Principles of Turbomachinery”, Edition:1,John Wiley & Sons,2011.
3. Erik Dick, “Fundamentals of Turbo machines”, Edition:1,Springer,2015.
L T P C
MEC18R329:GAS DYNAMICS AND JET PROPULSION
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite:Fluid Mechanics and Course Category:Major Elective
Machinery, Thermal Engineering Course Type :Theory
To understand the features of compressible isentropic flows and irreversibilities like shocks.
To provide a basic knowledge of jet and rocket propulsion technologies
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Understand the basic concepts of compressible flow
CO2 Analyze the isentropic flow
CO3 Analyze compressible flows with friction and heat transfer and examine shock waves
CO4 Explain the concept of jet propulsion
CO5 Evaluate the performance of rocket propulsion systems

CO1 3 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 2 3
CO4 3 3 2 1 2 3 3
CO5 3 2 3 2 1 2 2 3
Course Topics:
Unit-I:FUNDAMENTALS OF COMPRESSIBLE FLOW
Compressible flow, definition, Mach waves and Mach cone, stagnation states, Mass, momentum and energy
equations of one-dimensional flow.
Unit-II:ISENTROPIC FLOW
Isentropic flow through variable area ducts, nozzle s and diffusers, subsonic and supersonic flow, variable area
ducts, choked flow, Area Mach number relations for isentropic flow
Unit-III:FANNO FLOW, RAYLEIGH FLOW AND NORMAL SHOCKS

Flow through constant area ducts - Rayleigh and Fanno flows, Normal shock relations, oblique shock relations,
isentropic and shock tables
Unit-IV:JET PROPULSION
Theory of jet propulsion, thrust equation, thrust power and propulsive efficiency, Operating principle and cycle
analysis of ramjet, turbojet, turbofan and turboprop engines.
Unit-V:ROCKET PROPULSION
Types of rocket engines, propellants & feeding systems, ignition and combustion, theory of rocket propulsion,
performance study, staging, terminal and characteristic velocity, space flights
Text Book(s):
1. S. M. Yahya , “Fundamental of compressible flow”, Edition:5,New Age International (P) Ltd., New
Delhi,2016.
2. H. Patrich , “Introduction to Compressible fluid flow”, Edition:2,CRC Press,2013.
Reference(s):
1. F. Ahmed. , “Aircraft Prpoulsion and Gas Turbine Engines”, Edition:1,CRC Press,2008.
2. H.S. Mukunda, “Understanding Aerospace Chemical Propulsion”, Edition:1,Interline Publishing,2004.
3. P. Hill, “Mechanics & Thermodynamics of Propulsion”, Edition:2,Addison Wesley,1992.
L T P C
MEC18R401:POWER PLANT ENGINEERING
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite:MEC18R202 - Course Category:Major Elective
Thermodynamics Course Type :Theory
To acquire knowledge on operation, performance analysis and environmental effects of power plants
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Explain the principle of operation of thermal power plant and its accessories
CO2 Illustrate nuclear and hydel power plants, and its environmental impact
Analyze performance of gas turbine and diesel engine power plants, and its environmental
CO3
consequences
CO4 Discuss various types of power plants using renewable energy sources
CO5 Apply the cost benefit analysis to power generation and distribution

CO1 3 1 1 2 3
CO2 3 1 1 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 1 3
CO4 3 1 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 3
Course Topics:
Unit-I:THERMAL POWER PLANT
Coal based thermal power plants, basic Rankine cycle and its modifications, layout of modern coal power plant,
super critical boilers, FBC boilers, turbines, condensers, steam and heating rates, subsystems of thermal power
plants, fuel and ash handling, draught system, feed water treatment, Coal disposal for Thermal power plant
binary cycles and cogeneration systems
Unit-II:NUCLEAR AND HYDEL POWER PLANT

Basics of nuclear energy conversion, Layout and subsystems of nuclear power plants, Boiling Water Reactor
(BWR), Pressurized Water Reactor (PWR), CANDU Reactor, Pressurized Heavy Water Reactor (PHWR), Fast
Breeder Reactors (FBR), gas cooled and liquid metal cooled reactors, safety measures for nuclear power
plants,Waste disposal for nuclear power plant Hydroelectric power plants, classification, typical layout and
components
Unit-III:GAS TURBINE AND DIESEL POWER PLANT

Gas turbine and combined cycle power plants, Brayton cycle analysis and optimization, components of gas
turbine power plants, combined cycle power plants, Integrated Gasifier based Combined Cycle (IGCC) systems-
Diesel engine power plant – components and lay-out, selection of engine type, environmental hazards.
Unit-IV:UNCONVENTIONAL POWER PLANTS

Unconventional power plants – Solar PV and Solar Thermal, wind, ocean thermal energy conversion, tidal and
geothermal power plants, MHD concepts of energy conversion, Fuel Cell power systems, Biogas.
Unit-V:PLANT ECONOMICS
Load curve – definition – fixed and operating costs, comparison of economics of different types of power plants,
tariff types, pollution control technologies for different power plants
Text Book(s):
1. R. K.Rajput, , “Power Plant Engineering”, Edition:5,Laxmi Publications,2016.
2. Domkundwar and Arora Domkundwar, “Power Plant Engineering”, Edition:6,Dhanpat Rai & Co,2016.
Reference(s):
1. EI- Wakil, “Power Plant Engineering”, Edition:1,McGraw-Hill,2010.
2. P.K. Nag, “Power plant Engineering”, Edition:4,,Tata McGraw-Hill,2014.
3. K. K. Ramalingam, “Power Plant Engineering”, Edition:1,Scitech Publications,2010.
L T P C
MEC18R402:AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite:MEC18R274- Thermal Course Category:Major Elective
Engineering Course Type :Theory
To understand the construction and working principle of various parts of an automobile
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Outline the general classifications and functions of automobiles engines
Interpret and analyze the working principles of steering system, brakes and suspension
CO2
system.
CO3 Examine the working principle of automobile transmission systems
Distinguish the various engine auxiliary system and automotive electrical and electronic
CO4
system
CO5 Analyze the importance of alternate fuels and its properties to the environment

CO1 2 2 2 2 1 2 1
CO2 2 2 2 2 1
CO3 2 2 2 2 1
CO4 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO5 2 2 2 1 2 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I:VEHICLE STRUCTURE AND ENGINES
Types of automobiles, vehicle construction and layouts, chassis, frame and body, vehicle aerodynamics, IC
engines- components, function and materials, variable valve timing (VVT).
Unit-II:STEERING, BRAKES AND SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

Steering geometry and Steering linkages, types of steering gear box, power steering, types of front axle, types of
suspension systems, pneumatic and hydraulic braking systems, antilock braking system (ABS), electronic brake
force distribution (EBD) and traction control.
Unit-III:TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS
Clutch types & construction, gear boxes- manual and automatic gear shift mechanisms, over drive, transfer box,
flywheel, torque converter, propeller shaft, slip joints, universal joints, differential and rear axle, Hotchkiss drive
and Torque tube drive.
Unit-IV:ENGINE AUXILIARY SYSTEMS

Electronic injection for SI and CI engines, unit injector system, rotary distributor type and common rail direct
injection system, transistor based coil ignition & capacitive discharge ignition systems, turbo chargers (WGT,
VGT), engine emission control by 3-way catalytic converter system, Emission norms (Euro & BS).
Unit-V:ALTERNATE ENERGY SOURCES

Alternative energy sources, natural gas, LPG, biodiesel, bio-ethanol, gasohol and hydrogen fuels in automobiles,
modifications needed, performance, combustion & emission characteristics of alternative fuels in SI and CI
engines, Electric and Hybrid vehicles, application of Fuel Cell.
Text Book(s):
1. Kirpal Singh, “Automobile Engineering”, Edition:13,Standard Publishers,2014.
2. K. K Jain, “Automobile Engineering”, Edition:5,,Tata McGraw Hill Publishers,2012.
Reference(s):
1. V. Ganesan, “Internal Combustion Engines”, Edition:4,Tata McGraw Hill Publishers,2012.
2. R. K. Rajput, “A Text Book of Automobile Engineering”, Edition:1,,Laxmi Publications,2015.
3. J. Heitner, “, “ Automotive Mechanics”, Edition:2,East-West Press,1999.
L T P C
MEC18R305 : MICROPROCESSORS IN AUTOMATION
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
To understand the basic concepts of Digital circuits, Microprocessor system and digital Controller and
Interfacing
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Explain the basic concepts of microprocessor number system
CO2 Interpret the basics of instructions set in microprocessor 8085
CO3 Analyze the usage of peripheral devices of 8085 for advanced interfacing
CO4 Apply the real time interfacing of 8085
CO5 Analyze the usage of signal processing for real time measurements

CO1 2 2 1 2 1 1
CO2 2 1
CO3 3 2 1 3 3 3 2
CO4 3 2 2 2
CO5 3 1 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I: NUMBERS SYSTEMS AND DIGITAL USAGE
Number Systems, codes, digital electronics: Logic Gates, combinational circuits design, Flip-flops, Sequential
logic circuits design: Counters, Shift registers. Introduction to 8085 Functional Block Diagram, Registers, ALU,
Bus systems, Timing and control signals.
Unit-II: MACHINE INSTRUCTIONS

Machine cycles, instruction cycle and timing states, instruction timing diagrams, Memory interfacing.
Unit-III: MICROPROCESSOR AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES

Assembly Language Programming: Addressing modes, Instruction set, simple programs in 8085; Concept of
Interrupt, Need for Interrupts, Interrupt structure, and Multiple Interrupt requests and their handling,
Programmable interrupt controller; Interfacing peripheral. Programmable peripheral interface (8255)
Unit-IV: MICRO PROCESSOR 8085 AND INTERFACING

Interfacing Analog to Digital Converter & Digital to Analog converter, Multiplexed seven segments LED display
systems, Stepper Motor Control, Data Communication: Serial Data communication (8251), Programmable Timers
(8253); 8086/8088 Microprocessor and its advanced features
Unit-V: INTRODUCTION TO SIGNAL PROCESSING

Introduction to Digital Control: Sampling theorem, Signal conversion and Processing, Z-Transform, Digital
Filters, Implementation of Digital Algorithm.
Text Book(s):
1. W. H. Gothman, “Digital Electronics: An Introduction to Theory and Practice”, Edition: 2, Prentice
Hall , 1982.
2. Albert Paul Malvino, “Digital Computer Electronics: An Introduction to Microcomputers”, Edition: 2,
McGraw-Hill, , 1983.
Reference(s):
1. Ramesh Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming, and Applications with the 8085”,
Edition: 6, PENRAM International Publishers , 2013.
2. B.C. Kuo, “Digital Control Systems”, Edition: 2, Oxford University Press , 2007.
3. L. A. Leventhal, “Microcomputer Experimentation with the Intel SDK-85”, Edition: 1, Prentice Hall ,
1980.
MEC18R319 : PROCESS PLANNING AND COST L T P C

ESTIMATION 3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
To introduce the process planning concepts and to make cost estimation for various products after
process planning
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Outline the various process planning stages with its design and selections.
Demonstration of various functions of Estimation and Costing with references to
CO2
productions and control
CO3 Analyse the various elements associated with cost estimation.
CO4 Measure of machining time of various manufacturing operations.
CO5 Analyse and estimate the product cost for various manufacturing processes

CO1 2 2 2 2 3 1
CO2 2 3 3 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 1
CO4 2 2 2 2
CO5 2 2 2 3 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I: PROCESS PLANNING
Introduction of Process Planning- methods of process planning, drawing interpretation, material evaluation,
steps in process selection, production equipment and tooling selection
Unit-II: ESTIMATING AND COSTING

Importance and aims of cost estimation - functions of estimation - costing - importance and aims of costing -
difference between costing and estimation - importance of realistic estimates - estimation procedure.-Process
planning activities- documents for process planning, economics of process planning, case studies
Unit-III: COST ESTIMATION

Introduction to cost estimation- importance of costing and estimation, methods of costing, elements of cost
estimation, types of estimates, estimating procedure, estimation of labor cost, material cost, allocation of
overhead charges, calculation of depreciation cost.
Unit-IV: ESTIMATION OF MACHINING TIME

Machining time estimation- importance of machine time calculation, machining time for different lathe
operations, drilling and boring time calculations, Machining time calculation for Milling, Shaping, Planing and
Grinding
Unit-V: PRODUCT COST ESTIMATION

Production costs- different production processes for different jobs, estimation of forging cost, estimation of
welding cost, estimation of foundry cost, estimation of machining cost
Text Book(s):
1. Peter Scalon, “Process Planning, Design/ Manufacture Interface”, Edition: 1, Butterworth-Heinemann
, 2003.
2. P. F. Ostwaal and J. Munez , “Manufacturing Processes and Systems”, Edition: 9, John Wiley , 1998.
Reference(s):
1. A. K. Chitale and R. C. Gupta, “Product Design and Manufacturing”, Edition: 6, Prentice Hall of
India Pvt. Ltd. , 2014.
2. Nauna Singh, “System approach to Computer Integrated Design and Manufacturing”, Edition: 1,
Wiley , 1996.
3. J. G. Monks, “Operations Management, Theory and Problems”, Edition: 3, McGraw Hill Book
Company , 1987.
MEC18R324 : PLANT LAYOUT AND MATERIAL L T P C

HANDLING 3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
The aim of this course is to develop basic understanding of plant layout and material handling.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Define the various plant layout methods and facilities required for process planning.
CO2 Identify the service requirements and selection of sites pertaining to plant location.
CO3 Classify various space requirements and layout techniques for various production plants.
CO4 Analyze various production flow problems related to industrial scenario.
CO5 Outline various machines and material handling equipment.

CO1 2 3 2 2 2 1 2
CO2 3 3 3 2 2 1 2 3
CO3 3 2 3 1 1 2
CO4 2 2 3 3 1 3
CO5 1 3 1 2 1 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I: INTRODUCTION TO FACILITY DESIGN
Facilities requirements- need for layout study – types of layout- Symptoms of poor layout, Technique and
procedure to determine plant layout.- facilities design - sources of information for facilities design - process design
- flow analysis techniques.
Unit-II: PLANT LAYOUT- WORKSTATION DESIGN

Site selection- plant location analysis – factors- costs - location decisions- Pitfalls in selection of site location,
Economic versus social significance – auxiliary -plant cost – land – building and production – equipment - material
cost - services requirement- employee services- space requirements- activity relationship analysis.
Unit-III: SPACE REQUIREMENTS

Office layout techniques and space requirements - area allocation - application of computer simulation and
modeling - simple problems in single facility location models - network location problems.
Unit-IV: PRODUCTION FLOW DESIGN

Organization chart - activity relationship chart - production routing sheets - flow process chart - worksheet for
activity relationship chart- nodal diagram- operation chart - assembly chart for product - package design unit load
design - departmental layout - production flow analysis (PFA) - line balancing - financial analysis - design cycle
– SLP procedure manpower - machinery requirements – computer algorithms – ALDAP, CORELAP, CRAFT.
Unit-V: MACHINES AND MATERIAL HANDLING

Computations of machine requirements - area and cost of production equipments- Manual and mechanical
handling, Handling ratio, Effects of handling on productivity - unit load concept - material handling system design
- handling equipment types - selection and specification - containers and packaging - receiving and shipping areas
- storage analysis - plant services - total space requirements.
Text Book(s):
1. F. E. Meyers and M. P. Stephens , “Manufacturing Facilities Design and Material Handling”, Edition:
4, Prentice-Hall, Inc. , 2014.
2. M. James Apple, “Plant layout and Material Handling”, Edition: 3, John Wiley & Sons Inc. , 1977.
Reference(s):
1. J. A. Tompkins and J. A. White , “Facilities and Planning”, Edition: 4, John Wiley , 2010.
2. L. Richard Francis and J. A. White, “Facilities Layout and Location - an Analytical Approach”, Edition:
2, Prentice Hall Inc. , 2004.
3. S. C. Sharma, “Plant layout and Material Handling”, Edition: 3, Khanna Publishers , 2000.
MEC18R334 : FOUNDRY MECHANIZATION AND L T P C

MANAGEMENT 3 0 0 3
In this course you will develop skills across a range of processes and materials which are commonly
used in automobile industries. The course will be introduced to discuss the different methods and
materials through specific projects, with an emphasis on the relation to individual concepts in making
automobile components. Some of these include; conventional casting stir casting, centrifugal casting,
lost wax casting (aluminium), fabrication in metal and timber pattern making.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Define the basic principles of casting and foundry processes with its modern techniques
Evaluate and identify the specific methods, furnace and materials in order to materialize the
CO2
specific individual concepts
Identify the materials and methods in order to develop an effective automobile components
CO3
with the help of advanced casting techniques
CO4 Examine the casting process with its boundary conditions
Identify and apply the mechanism behind the solidification of metals and check for the
CO5
soundness of the components

CO1 3 2
CO2 3 3
CO3 3
CO4 3 3 3
CO5 2 1 1
Course Topics:
Introduction to casting and foundry industry- basic principles of casting processes-sequence in foundry
operations- patterns- moulding practice- Modern techniques used in insert and removal of different kinds of
cores made of other than sand- ingredients of moulding sand and core sand- sand testing- different moulding
processes.
Unit-II: FURNACES
Types of furnaces used in foundry-furnaces for melting, melting practice for steel, cast iron, aluminium alloys,
copper alloys and magnesium alloys- Furnaces withstanding higher temperature - Fuels and combustion
techniques to improve resident temperature in furnaces- safety considerations- fluxing, degassing and
inoculation
Unit-III: SPECIAL CASTING TECHNIQUE

Sand casting- permanent mould casting, die casting, centrifugal casting, plaster mould casting, investment
casting, continuous casting, squeeze casting, full mould process, and strip casting.
Unit-IV: CASTING PROCESS

Overview of pouring and solidification- concept of shrinkage- Chvorinov’s rule- chilling-gating systems-
functions of riser- types of riser- bottom pouring and top pouring -yield calculations- visualization of mould
filling (modeling).
Unit-V: SOLIDIFICATION
Concepts of solidification, directional solidification- role of chilling- filtration of liquid metals, consumables-
details of inoculation and modification – with respect to cast irons and Al-Si system- casting defects- soundness
of casting and its assessment.
Text Book(s):
1. United States Navy Department, “Foundry Manual”, Edition: 1, Fredonia Books , 2006.
2. R. W. Heine, C. R. Loper and P. C. Rosenthal, “Principles of Metal Casting”, Edition: 2, Tata
McGraw Hill Publishers , 2001.
Reference(s):
1. J. Wulff, H. F. Taylor and M. C. Fleming, “Foundry Engineering”, Edition: 1, Chapman and Hall
London , 1959.
2. P. L. Jain, “Principles of Foundry Technology”, Edition: 5, Tata McGraw Hill , 2017.
3. N. K. Srinivasan, “Foundry Engineering”, Edition: 3, Khanna Publications , 2001.
L T P C
MEC18R404 : PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
To make the student understand about how the planning, decision making activities on utilizing
human resources effectively, how to motivate and lead a team and how to control and report a
problem occurred in organization
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Elaborate the basic concepts of management and types of organizations.
CO2 Identify the process of planning tools and explain the decision making processes.
CO3 Demonstrate the HRM process for making effective organization
CO4 Explain the leadership qualities and motivation theories.
CO5 Demonstrate the controlling process related to computers

CO1 3 3 2
CO2 2 2 2 1
CO3 1 2 2 2 2 1
CO4 1 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 3
Course Topics:
Definition of management, science or art, manager vs entrepreneur; Types of managers managerial roles and
skills; Evolution of management- scientific, human relations, system and contingency approaches; Types of
Business Organizations, sole proprietorship, partnership, company, public and private enterprises; Organization
culture and environment
Unit-II: CURRENT TRENDS AND ISSUES IN MANAGEMENT

Nature and purpose of Planning, types of Planning, objectives, setting objectives, policies, Strategic
Management, Planning Tools and Techniques, Decision making steps & processes.
Unit-III: ORGANIZING AND HRM

Nature and purpose of Organizing, formal and informal organization, organization structure, types, line and
staff authority, departmentalization, delegation of authority, centralization and decentralization, job design,
human resource management, HR planning, Recruitment selection, Training & Development, Performance
Management, Career planning and Management.
Unit-IV: MOTIVATION AND LEADERSHIP

Directing, individual and group behavior, motivation, motivation theories, motivational techniques, job
satisfaction, job enrichment, leadership, types & theories of leadership, effective communication.
Unit-V: CONTROLLING AND REPORTING

Controlling, system and process of controlling, budgetary and non-budgetary control techniques, use of
computers and IT in management control, productivity problems and management, control and performance,
direct and preventive control, reporting.
Text Book(s):
1. S. P. Robins and M. Couiter, “Management”, Edition: 10, Prentice Hall India , 2009.
2. J.A.F. Stoner, R. E. Freeman and D. R. Gilbert, “Management”, Edition: 6, Pearson Education , 2004.
Reference(s):
1. P. C. Tripathy and P. N. Reddy, “Principles of Management”, Edition: 5, Tata McGraw Hill , 2012.
2. T. Ramaswamy, “Principles of Management”, Edition: 1, Himalaya Publishing house , 2003.
3. Dipak Bhattacharya, “Principles of Management : Text and Cases”, Edition: 1, Pearson Education
India , 2011.
L T P C
MEC18R416 : INDUSTRIAL SAFETY
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
This course aims to acquaint with the idea of Safety Rules followed in Industries and recognize the
safety legislation, OHS, safety management and Human factors Issues.
Course Outcome(s):
Illustrate the representation of various Safety theories and Principles followed in Real
CO1
Time Industries.
CO2 Identify the various safety tools that can be used to solve the industrial problems.
CO3 Apply the fire prevention methods for various types of fire.
CO4 Categorizing the various types of hazards in workplace, effects and its control measures.
CO5 Utilize the various safety standards that can be applicable in industries.

CO1 2
CO2 2 2 3 2 2 1 3
CO3 3 2 2 2 2
CO4 1 2 2 1 2
CO5 2 2 2 2 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I: ACCIDENT PREVENTION
Definitions - history of safety movement - ILO – NSC – BSC – LPA Industrial safety, Industrial hygiene and
safety aspects related to toxicity, noise, pressure, temperature, vibrations, radiation etc. Explosions including dust,
vapour, cloud and mist explosion.
Unit-II: SAFETY MANAGEMENT

Safety systems - safety information system – safety control system - hazard and risk analysis – Theories and
principles of accident causation - cost of accidents – accident reporting and investigation – safety committee -
safety suggestion scheme - Safety education and training –safety management techniques
Unit-III: FIRE PREVENTION AND PROTECTION

Sources of ignition – fire triangle – principles of fire extinguishing – active and passive fire protection systems –
various classes of fires – A, B, C, D, E – types of fire extinguishers – fire stoppers – hydrant pipes – hoses –
monitors – fire watchers – layout of stand pipes – fire station-fire alarms and sirens – maintenance of fire trucks
– foam generators – escape from fire rescue operations – fire drills – notice-first aid for burns.
Unit-IV: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND HYGIENE

Physical hazards - chemical hazards – recognition of hazards – evaluation – control measures - occupational
health – concept and spectrum of health – industrial toxicology – definitions – hazard – toxicity – local and
systemic effect – routes of entry
Unit-V: SAFETY REGULATION

History of legislations related to safety - Environmental protection Act
Text Book(s):
1. D. L. Goetsch, “Occupational Safety and Health, for Technologists, Engineering, and Managers”,
Edition: 5, Prentice Hall , 2005.
2. C. Ray Asfahl, “Industrial Safety and Health Management”, Edition: 5 , Pearson Prentice Hall , 2003.
Reference(s):
1. F. P. Lees, “Loss Prevention in Process Industries”, Edition: 2, Butterworth - Heinemann , 1996.
2. Willie Hammer and Dennis Price, “Occupational Safety Management and Engineering”, Edition: 5,
Prentice Hall , 2001.
3. E. J. McCornick and M. S. Sanders, “Human Factors in Engineering and Design”, Edition: 7,
McGraw-Hill Education , 1992.
L T P C
MEC18R417 : WORK STUDY
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
This course will focus on mathematical modelling. A strong emphasis will be given to model
formulation.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Contrast the relationship between productivity, work content and time.
CO2 Illustrate the operations and ineffective time in shop floor.
CO3 Apply the various process and time study methods.
CO4 Analyze the various jobs in order to provide factual information.
CO5 Design of physical and psychosocial work systems and workplaces.

CO1 2 2
CO2 1 2 1 1
CO3 2 2 2
CO4 2 2 2 1 2 1
CO5 1 1 3 1 1 2 1 2 3
Course Topics:
History of work study - Purpose of work study, its objective, procedures & applications- productivity and living
standards - productivity measurement - work design and the organization- work content and time.
Unit-II: OPERATIONS STUDY

Objectives and basic procedure of work measurements -Total time for a job or operation - total work content and
ineffective time - methods and motions - graphic tools.
Unit-III: PROCESS AND TIME STUDY

Process analysis - process and activity charts - operation analysis - basic procedure- micro motion study -
principles of motion economy - work measurement - stop watch time study - standard data - methods time
measurement (MTM) - development of production standards - work sampling - rating and allowances - setting
standard times for jobs - standard data - and predetermined time standards.
Unit-IV: JOB EVALUATION

Basic concepts - objective and subjective methods - Gantt incentive plans standard data system - compensation
schemes - relationship of work study to incentive schemes- wage incentive plans.
Unit-V: ERGONOMICS
Fundamental concepts- issues in design of systems - human performance in physical work - measuring work by
physiological means- work posture - fatigue measurement and evaluation - environmental factors and work
systems- industrial product design.
Text Book(s):
1. International Labour Organization, “Introduction to work study”, Edition: 4, International Labour
Organization, Geneva , 2012.
2. B. W. Niebel, “Motion and Time Study”, Edition: 7, R. D. Irwin , 1982.
Reference(s):
1. R. M. Barnes, “Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work”, Edition: 7, Wiley , 1980
2. R. S. Bridger, “Introduction to Ergonomics”, Edition: 3, CRC Press , 2008.
3. Curri and Faraday, “Work Study”, Edition: 4, ELBS , 2000.
MEC18R419 : PRODUCTION PLANNING AND L T P C

CONTROL 3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: MEC18R375 - Metal Course Category: Major Elective
cutting technology Course Type : Theory
To introduce the Production Planning concepts and to make Control for various production activities
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Outline various Production planning analysis with its design and selections.
CO2 Illustrate the concepts of value analysis, process planning and routing.
CO3 Examine the product data management and Enterprise application integration
CO4 Apply the various inventory control methods.
CO5 Identify the scheduling and dispatching methods, progress reporting and expediting.

CO1 2 2 2 2 3 2 2
CO2 2 2 2 3 2
CO3 2 3 1 1 2 2
CO4 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 2
CO5 2 1 1 1 2 2 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I: BASICS
Objectives - types of production - product development and design - standardization- simplification and
specialization - break even analysis – forecasting - need and its use - market share - sales trend analysis - use of
indicators and correlation analysis - effects - accuracy of forecasts.
Unit-II: PRODUCT PLANNING

Extending the original product information - value analysis - process planning and routing - steps in process
planning
Unit-III: PRODUCT DATA MANAGEMENT

Product data management (PDM) - Enterprise application integration (EAI).
Unit-IV: INVENTORY CONTROL

Material and tool control - physical control - record keeping - two-bin material control system – the super market
concept - procurement and control of tools - inventory control - determination of economic order quantity and
economic lot size- ABC analysis - reorder point and lead time - MRP I and II - JIT and KANBAN.
Unit-V: SCHEDULING AND DISPATCHING

Loading and scheduling information rearranging for loading and scheduling - master scheduling - perceptual
loading - order scheduling devices – dispatching - progress reporting and expediting.
Text Book(s):
1. Samuel Eilon, “Elements of Production Planning and control”, Edition: 3, Universal Publishing Corp.
, 2014.
2. Martand Telsang, “Industrial Engineering and Production Management”, Edition: 1, S. Chand and
Company , 2000.
Reference(s):
1. E. S. Buffa, “Modern Production/Operations Management”, Edition: 8, John Wiley and Sons , 2007.
2. E. D. Scheele, “Principles and Design of Production Control Systems”, Edition: 1, Prentice Hall ,
2000.
3. K. C. Jain and L. N. Aggarwal, “Production planning control and Industrial Management”, Edition: 6,
Khanna Punlishers , 2002.
MEC18R424 : INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION AND L T P C

ROBOTICS 3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: MEC18R374 – Course Category: Major Elective
Kinematics of Machinery Course Type : Theory
To produce engineering graduates who are competent and able to apply principles of science and
engineering for solving current problems related to industrial automation and robotics.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Illustrate the production concept and strategies of automation.
CO2 Construct the CIM architecture and FMS.
CO3 Design of flow lines and the implementation of line balancing methods.
Examine the function of automated material handling and storage systems and apply the
CO4
inspection methods involved in CMM and machine vision.
CO5 Design of industrial robots.

CO1 2 1 1 1 1 1
CO2 2 1 2 1 2
CO3 3 2 3 1 2 2 3 2 2
CO4 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 3 2 2 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I: INTRODUCTION TO AUTOMATION
Classification of Manufacturing Industries – Types of Production – Functions in Manufacturing – Organization
and Information processing in Manufacturing – production concepts and mathematical models – concepts,
definition, objective, arguments and strategies of automation.
Unit-II: CIM AND FMS

Nature role and development of CIM Architecture- computers in CIM-simulation software - Group technology-
part families-parts classification and Coding-Production Flow analysis-cellular manufacturing cell design-
benefits MRP I and II -computer aided quality control.
Definitions – classifications – flexibility – typical configurations – computer control systems – planning the
FMS – analysis methods for flexible manufacturing systems – applications and benefits.
Unit-III: AUTOMATED FLOW LINES AND ASSEMBLY SYSTEMS

General terminology – analysis of transfer lines with and without storage buffers – partial automation –
computer simulation of automated flow lines – assembly systems and line balancing – methods of line balancing
– computerized line balancing methods.
Unit-IV: AUTOMATED MATERIALS HANDLING AND STORAGE SYSTEMS

Functions – types of equipment, analysis and design of conveyor systems and automated guided vehicle
systems, automated storage/retrieval systems, carousel storage systems, work-in progress storage, interfacing
handling and storage with manufacturing - Inspection - Principles and methods – sensor technologies –
coordinate measuring machines, contact and noncontact inspection methods – machine vision.
Unit-V: INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS

Introduction to robot programming- Robot definition and types – Robot anatomy - Mobile Robot and its
advantages – Case studies – pick and place robot – automatic camera – washing machine – Application of
robots in industries
Text Book(s):
1. M. P. Groover, “Automation Production Systems, and Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, Edition:
4, Pearson Education , 2016.
2. D. M. Considine and G. D. Considine, “, Standard Hand Book of Industrial Automation”, Edition: 1,
Chapman and Hall Advanced Industrial Technology Series, Springer , 1987.
Reference(s):
1. P. Radhakrishnan and S. Subramaniyan, “CAD/CAM/CIM”, Edition: 4, New Age International (P)
Limited , 2018.
2. S. R. Deb and S. Deb, “Robotics Technology and Flexible Automation”, Edition: 2, Tata McGraw Hill
, 2009.
3. L. T. Ross, “Industrial Robotics Fundamentals: Theory and Applications”, Edition: 3, Goodheart-
Willcox , 2017.
MEC18R430 : INTEGRATED MANUFACTURING L T P C

SYSTEMS 3 1 0 4
To understand the application of computers in various aspects of Manufacturing viz., Design, Proper
planning, Manufacturing cost, Layout & Material Handling system.
Course Outcome(s):
Identify the opportunities in integrated manufacturing systems and the use of various
CO1
manufacturing strategy.
CO2 Apply the group technology and various process planning methods.
CO3 Apprehend the production planning and control and its techniques.
Illustrate the use of computers in controlling manufacturing process and in inspection
CO4
methods and testing
Relate the concepts of flexible manufacturing systems, CIM concepts in rapid prototyping,
CO5
artificial intelligence and expert systems.

CO1 2 1 1 2 2 1
CO2 2 1 2 2 2 1
CO3 2 3 3 2 2 2 1
CO4 2 1 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 2 2 3 3 2 2 2 2
Course Topics:
Objectives of a manufacturing system – identifying business opportunities and problems classification production
systems – linking manufacturing strategy and systems analysis of manufacturing operation.
Unit-II: GROUP TECHNOLOGY AND COMPUTER AIDED PROCESS PLANNING

Introduction – part families – parts classification and cooling – group technology machine cells benefits of group
technology. Process planning function CAPP – computer generated time standards.
Unit-III: COMPUTER AIDED PLANNING AND CONTROL

Production planning and control – cost planning and control – inventory management – material requirement
planning (MRP) - shop floor control – factory data collection system – automatic identification system – barcode
technology – automatic data collection system.
Unit-IV: COMPUTER MONITORING

Types of production monitoring system – structure model of manufacturing process – process control & strategies
– direct digital control – supervisory computer control – computer in QC – contact inspection methods non –
contact inspection method – computer – aided testing – integration of CAQC with CAD/CAM
Unit-V: INTEGRATED MANUFACTURING SYSTEM

Definition – application – features – types of manufacturing systems – machine tools – materials handling system
– computer control system – DNC systems manufacturing cell. Flexible manufacturing system (FMS) – the FMS
concept – transfer systems – head changing FMS – variable mission manufacturing system – CAD/CAM system
– human labor in the manufacturing system – computer integrated manufacturing system benefits. Rapid
prototyping – artificial intelligence and expert system in CIM
Text Book(s):
1. M. P. Groover, “Automation Production Systems, and Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, Edition:
4, Pearson , 2016.
2. A. Alavudeen, N Venkateshwaran, “Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, Edition: 1, PHI Learning ,
2008.
Reference(s):
1. David Bedworth, “Computer Integrated Design and Manufacturing”, Edition: 1, TMH , 1998.
2. J. A. Rehg and H. W. Kraebber, “Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, Edition: 3, Pearson , 2004.
3. J. B. Waldner, “Principles of Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, Edition: 1, Wiley , 1992.
L T P C
MEC18R438 : TERO TECHNOLOGY
3 1 0 4
Pre-requisite: Nil
The aim of undergoing this course is to understand the Maintenance and Reliability Engineering field;
it introduces maintenance aspects of planning, control, costs, design, purchasing and installation
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Know the basic concepts of Probability distributions
CO2 Identify the different type of Reliability techniques and models
CO3 Summarize the various maintainability and reliability concepts
CO4 Understand the principles of plant replacement policy
Examine the knowledge on condition based maintenance monitoring of vibration
CO5
parameters

CO1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO2 1 2 1 1 1
CO3 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO4 1 2 1 1 2 1
CO5 1 1 1 1 1 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I: PROBABILITY CONCEPTS
Probability distributions – density and distribution functions for uniform, exponential, rezeligh, weibull, normal
distribution – Non-maintained systems
Unit-II: RELIABILITY
Definition and its important – method of improving reliability redundancy techniques – failure data analysis –
Reliability models – Hazard models – constant, linearly increasing and weibull models estimating of reliability,
failure density and MTTF for hazard models
Unit-III: MAINTENANCES SYSTEMS AND ECONOMICS OF RELIABILITY

Maintainability and availability concepts, MTBF, MTTR, MTBM & MDT repair hazard rate, maintainability and
availability functions and their mathematical expressions
Unit-IV: MAINTENANCE AND SPARES MANAGEMENT

Preventive replacement- individual breakdown replacement policy – individual preventive replacement policy –
preventive group replacement
Unit-V: CONDITION BASED MAINTENANCE

Advantages and disadvantages – vibration monitoring –vibration parameters – vibration instruments
Text Book(s):
1. L. S. Srinath, “Reliability Engineering”, Edition: 1, Affiliated East West Press Pvt.Ltd , 2011.
2. R. Collacoot, “Mechanical Fault Diagnosis & condition monitoring”, Edition: 1, Springer , 1977.
Reference(s):
1. E. Balagurusamy, “Reliability Engineering”, Edition: 1, Tata Mcgraw Hill Publishing Company ,
2017.
2. Bikas Bhadury and S. K. Basu, “Terotechnology: Reliability Engineering and Maintenance
Management”, Edition: 1, Asian Books Pvt. Ltd. , 2008.
3. T. M. Husband, “Maintenance management and terotechnology”, Edition: 1, Saxon House , 1976.
L T P C
MEC18R330 : ROBOTICS AND ROBOT APPLICATIONS
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
Students will gain knowledge in automation with brief history of robot and its applications.
Basic knowledge acquired in robot end effectors and their design. Robot Programming methods &
Languages of robot.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Classify the different types of robots and its anatomy.
CO2 Construct the robot kinematic and its design.
CO3 Develop programming principles and languages for a robot control system.
CO4 Discuss various applications of industrial robot systems.
CO5 Compare the different robot configuration and its application in various industries.

CO1 2 1 1 2
CO2 2 1 2 1 1 2
CO3 2 1 3 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO4 2 2 3 2
CO5 2 3 3 2 2
Course Topics:
Fundamentals of Robotics- robot anatomy, robot classification.
Unit-II: ROBOT KINEMATICS

General characteristics - classification - special purpose tools - assembly fixtures – Typical designs, compliance
in wrists - end effectors multiple end effectors systems.
Unit-III: ROBOT PROGRAMMING

Robot programming and languages - robot language development, language classification.
Unit-IV: ROBOT INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS

Robot applications - robot applications in manufacturing: material transfer and machine loading / unloading -
processing operations like welding and painting - assembly operations – inspection, Safety considerations.
Unit-V: ROBOT DEVELOPMENTS

Recent developments in advanced robotics - special applications of robotics - nuclear industry, surgery, food
manufacturing - miniature and micro robotics: technologies and applications.
Text Book(s):
1. Harry Colestock, “Industrial Robotics”, Edition: 1, McGraw Hill Book Co, New Delhi , 2005.
2. M.P. Groover, “Industrial Robotics: Technology, Programming, and Applications”, Edition: 2,
Mcgraw Hill Education , 2012.
Reference(s):
1. S.R. Deb, “Robotics Technology and Flexible Automation”, Edition: 2, McGraw Hill India , 2010.
2. C.S.G. Lee, K.S. Fu and Ralph Gonzalez, “Robotics Control Sensing Vision and Intelligence”, Edition:
1, , McGraw Hill India , 2008.
3. Rex Miller, Mark R. Miller, “Robots and Robotics: Principles, Systems, and Industrial Applications”,
Edition: 1, McGraw Hill Professional , 2017.
L T P C
MEC18R304:MECHATRONIC SYSTEMS
3 1 0 4
Pre-requisite:ECE18R231- Basic Course Category:Major Elective
Electronic Engineering Course Type :Theory
• To understand the structure of microprocessors and their applications in mechanical devices
• To understand the principle of automatic control and real time motion control systems, with
the help of electrical drives and actuators
• To understand the use of micro-sensors and their applications in various fields learn about
work and heat interactions, and balance of energy between system and its surroundings.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Explain the basic concepts systems integration and modeling.
CO2 Interpret the idea interfacing sensor and system.
CO3 Interpret the idea of interfacing actuating drives with system.
CO4 Demonstrate the real time advanced sensors and materials in mechatronics system.
CO5 Analyze various integration of mechatronics system and automation.

CO1 2 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2
CO3 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2
CO4 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I:INTRODUCTION TO MECHATRONICS SYSTEMS
Introduction: Definition of Mechanical Systems, Philosophy and approach; Systems and Design: Mechatronic
approach, Integrated Product Design, Modeling, Analysis and Simulation, Man-Machine Interface
Unit-II:MECHANICAL PROPERTIES AND SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS

Classification, Development in Transducer technology, Opto-electronics-Shaft encoders, CD Sensors, Vision
System, etc.
Unit-III:DRIVES AND ACTUATORS

Hydraulic and Pneumatic drives, Electrical Actuators such as servo motor and Stepper motor, Drive circuits,
open and closed loop control; Embedded Systems: Hardware Structure, Software Design and Communication,
Programmable Logic Devices, Automatic Control and Real Time Control Systems
Unit-IV:SMART MATERIALS
Shape Memory Alloy, Piezoelectric and Magneto strictive Actuators: Materials, Static and dynamic
characteristics, illustrative examples for positioning, vibration isolation, etc.
Unit-V:MICROMECHATRONIC SYSTEMS
Microsensors, Microactuators; Micro-fabrication techniques LIGA Process: Lithography, etching, Micro-joining
etc. Application examples; Case studies Examples of Mechatronic Systems from Robotics Manufacturing,
Machine Diagnostics, Road vehicles and Medical Technology.
Text Book(s):
1. Devdas Shetty & Richard A. Kolk, “Mechatronics System Design”, Edition:2 ,Cengage ,2012.
2. William Bolton, “Mechatronics: A Multidisciplinary Approach”, Edition:4, Pearson Education,2014.
Reference(s):
1. R.K.Rajput, S. ChandA Textbook of Mechatronics”, Edition:1,S Chand & Company,2007.
2. William Bolton, Prentice Hall, “Mechatronics: Electronic Control Systems in Mechanical and Electrical
Engineering”, Edition:5,Pearson,2011.
3. Nitaigour Mahalik, “Mechatronics : Principles, Concepts and Applications”, Edition:1,McGraw Hill
Education,2017.
L T P C
MEC18R414:SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite:EEE18R272- Basic Course Category:Major Elective
Electrical Engineering Course Type :Theory
This course aims to disseminate the concept of various sensors with the recent developments,
principles of measuring parameters in sensors and transducers.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Applications of various sensors used in robotics and CNC machines.
CO2 Examine the Transducers suitability for various types of Mechanical applications.
CO3 Make use of the potentiometer and Thermocouple device for the real time applications.
Inspect the Piezoelectric crystal and Capacitance Transducers used for Measurement
CO4
systems.
CO5 Applications of various sensors used in robotics and CNC machines.

CO1 2 1 2
CO2 1 1 2
CO3 2 2 1 2
CO4 2 2 1 2
CO5 2 2 3 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I:INTRODUCTION & BASICS OF INSTRUMENTS
Definition of mechatronics. Mechatronics in manufacturing, products and design. Review of fundamentals of
electronics. Measurement systems – significance of measurements- methods of measurements – direct and
indirect methods - classification of instruments – deflection and null type - generalized measurement system -
characteristics of instruments
Unit-II:TRANSDUCERS
Transducer – definition - classification of transducer – analog and digital transducer - primary and secondary
transducer - active and passive transducer-inverse transducer - characteristics and choice of transducer - factors
influencing choice of transducer - resistance transducer - basic principle
Unit-III:POTENTIOMETER AND THERMOCOUPLE

Potentiometer – loading effects- resolution- linearity- non-linear potentiometer- noise in potentiometer -
resistance strain gauge – types- resistance thermometer - thermistors – characteristics - thermocouple –
compensation circuits – junction and lead – compensation - merits and demerits. Inductance transducer - basic
principle- linear variable differential transformer
Unit-IV:CAPACITANCE AND PIEZOELECTRIC CRYSTALS

Capacitance transducer – basic principle- Transducers using change in - area of plates - distance between plates
- variation of dielectric constants- frequency response - merits - demerits and uses - piezoelectric transducer -
basic principle - mode of operation - properties of piezoelectric crystals - loading effects - frequency response
and impulse response uses.
Unit-V:CNC TECHNOLOGY & ROBOT SENSORS

CNC machines and part programming. Industrial Robotics. Pressure sensors – bourdon tube- bellows- and
diaphragm - digital transducer – shaft encoder - optical encoder - digital speed transducer - Hall Effect
transducer - sound sensors - vibration sensors – seismic transducer - chemical sensor – PH sensor - velocity
transducer- introduction to smart sensors.
Text Book(s):
1. Sawhney, A.K, “A Course in Electrical and Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation”,
Edition:1,Dhanpat Rai and Co., (Pvt) Ltd,2005.
2. Renganathan, S, “Transducer Engineering”, Edition:2,, Allied publishers Limited,2003.
Reference(s):
1. Ernest O Doeblin “Measurement Systems – Application and Design”, Edition:2 McGraw-Hill Education
,1990.
2. Woolvert, G.A, “Transducer in Digital Systems”, Edition:1,Peter Peregrinus Ltd1979.
3. Patranabis, D, “Principles of Industrial Instrumentation”, Edition:3,Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing
Company Limited, New Delhi,,2018.
L T P C
MEC18R320 : FINITE ELEMENT METHODS
3 0 0 3
Course Category: Open Elective
Pre-requisite: Nil
This course will focus on finite element modelling of structural applications
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Apply the knowledge of Mathematics and Engineering to solve structural problems
Apply the concept of numerical methods to find the approximate solution for partial
CO2
differential equation
Evaluate the significance of coordinate measurement system for the one dimensional finite
CO3 element problems and using FEA software solve structural application problems such as
bar, trusses and beam
CO4 Perform numerical and software analysis of two dimensional & axisymmetric structures
CO5 Analyze the isoparametic element formulation using FEM

CO1 3 3 3 2 3 1
CO2 3 3 3 2 3 1
CO3 3 3 2 2 3 1
CO4 3 3 2 2 3 1
CO5 3 3 2 2 3 1
Course Topics:
Historical background – matrix approach – application to the continuum – Discretization matrix algebra –
governing equations for continuum – classical techniques in FEM – weighted residual method – Ritz method
Unit-II: ONE DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS

Finite element modeling – coordinates and shapes functions potential energy approach – Galerkin approach –
assembly of stiffness matrix and load vector – finite element equations– bending of beams – finite element
formulation of stiffness matrix and load vectors-one dimensional heat transfer.
Unit-III: TWO DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS – SCALAR VARIABLE PROBLEMS

Introduction – finite element modeling – scalar valued problem – CST element-stiffness matrix – force vector –
stress calculation – temperature effects – applications to scalar variable problems.
Unit-IV: TWO DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS – VECTOR VARIABLE PROBLEMS

Vector variable problems – elasticity equation – plain stress and strain - Axisymmetric formulation – element
stiffness matrix and force vector - boundary conditions – applications to cylinders under internal or external
pressures – rotating discs.
Unit-V: ISOPARAMETRIC ELEMENTS FORMULATION

The four node quadrilateral – shape functions – element stiffness matrix and force vector numerical integration
– Gaussian quadrature – Examples –uses of FEA software.
Text Book(s):
1. T.R. Chandrupatla, and A.D. Belegundu, “Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering”, Edition: 4,
2. P. Seshu, “Textbook of Finite Element Analysis”, Edition: 14, PHI Publication , 2015.
Reference(s):
1. D.V Hutton, “Fundamentals of Finite Element Analysis”, Edition: 1, McGraw-Hill Int , 2005.
2. S.S Rao, “The Finite Element Method in Engineering”, Edition: 2, Elsevier , 2013.
3. J.N. Reddy, “An Introduction to Finite Element Method”, Edition: 3, McGraw-Hill International
Student , 2005.
L T P C
MEC18R321 : OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
This course will focus on mathematical modelling. Strong emphases will begiven to model
formulation
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Explain the Formulation & Solving of non – linear programming.
CO2 Demonstrate the Unconstrained optimization
CO3 Ability to apply the Nonlinear Equations
CO4 Apply Constrained optimization methods
CO5 Contrast the recent techniques in optimization

CO1 3 2 1 2
CO2 1 1 1 2
CO3 2 3 3 2
CO4 2 3 2 2
CO5 3 3 1 2 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I: INTRODUCTION TO OPTIMIZATION
Classification of optimization problems - applications of optimization - concepts of design vector- design
constraints - constraint surface - objective function surfaces and multi -level optimization - quadratic
programming- non-linear programming – unconstrained optimization techniques- basics of constrained
optimization.
Unit-II: UNCONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION

Steepest-descent method-Newton methods - Quasi-Newton methods- linear/nonlinear conjugate gradient
methods-interval reduction methods- line-search methods- trust-region methods-local and global convergence.
Unit-III: NONLINEAR EQUATIONS

Newton's method - modified Newton’s methods; Brayden’s (quasi-Newton) method-Inexact Newton methods -
the bisection method - line-search methods and merit functions- trust - region methods- local and global
convergence.
Unit-IV: CONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION

Lagrange multipliers- Karush - Kuhn-Tucker conditions - line-search methods and merit functions active-
set methods (for inequality constraints) - penalty function methods (for equality constraints) - reduced-gradient
and gradient-projection methods - augmented Lagrangian and projected Lagrangian methods - Barrier
methods (for inequality constraints) - interior-point methods (for inequality constraints) - sequential linearly
constrained programming- sequential quadratic programming.
Unit-V: RECENT TECHNIQUES IN OPTIMIZATION

Convexity; linear programming, simplex and duplex method- quadratic programming- duality-nonlinear least-
squares problems-variational calculus- nonsmooth optimization-dynamic optimization and the maximum
principle of pontryagin- dynamic programming and the Hamilton- Jacobi-Bellman equation neural networks and
the back propagation algorithm- stochastic optimization- simulated annealing- genetic algorithms- neural
network based optimization- optimization of fuzzy systems – introduction to use of mat lab and other software
used in optimization.
Text Book(s):
1. K.P. Edwin, Chong, Stanislaw and H. Zak, “An Introduction to Optimization ”, Edition: 2, Wiley
Interscience , 2001.
2. Jorge Nocedal and Stephen Wright, “Numerical optimization”, Edition: 2, Springer publisher , 2006.
Reference(s):
1. J.E. Dennis and R.B. Schnabel, “2. Numerical methods for unconstrained optimization and nonlinear
equations”, Edition: 1, SIAM publications , 1993.
2. R. Fletcher, “Practical methods of optimization”, Edition: 2, John Wiley and Sons , 1987.
3. Chander Mohan and Kusum Deep, “Optimization Techniques”, Edition: 1, New Age Science , 2009.
L T P C
MEC18R323 : MATERIALS MANAGEMENT
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
To impart knowledge to provide the participant with various types of managerial activities in different
management related functions
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Illustrate the various functions of Materials Management.
CO2 Comprise the Methods of purchasing and Cost Analysis techniques.
CO3 Identify the functions of stores management and Material handling.
CO4 Interpret various deterministic and probabilistic models of inventory management systems.
CO5 Inspect the material requirement planning in the various systems of value analysis.

CO1 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
CO2 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 2
CO3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2
CO4 2 2
CO5 2 2 2 1 1 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I: FUNCTIONS OF MATERIALS MANAGEMENT
Introduction - objectives - organizations - functions - administration - integrated approach - relationship with
other department-make or buy decision- buying process.
Unit-II: PURCHASING MANAGEMENT

Purchasing policies and procedures - legal aspects - selection of sources of supply - forms and records - methods
of purchasing - capital purchasing ethics-vendor evaluation and rating, cost analysis
Unit-III: STORES MANAGEMENT

Store function - location - layout - materials handling and movement -stock taking-procedures and records –
ABC and VED system of stock control-ware housing and distribution management
Unit-IV: INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

EOQ - inventory systems - periodic - deterministic and probabilistic models - static inventory model – reorder
point – lead time analysis – safety stocks-ABC analysis
Unit-V: VALUE ANALYSIS

Standardization - variety reduction - JIT - MRP I, MRP II - vender evaluation and rating - inventory audit and
information systems.
Text Book(s):
1. Lamer Lee and D.W Dobler, “Purchasing and Materials Management”, Edition: 3, Tata McGraw-Hill
, 1996.
2. P. Gopalakrishnan, “Purchasing and Materials Management”, Edition: 4, Tata McGraw Hill

Publishing Co. Ltd , 2001.
Reference(s):
1. P. Gopalakrishnan, Abid haleem, “Handbook of Materials Management”, Edition: 2, Prentice Hall of
India , 2015.
2. Starr and Miller, “Inventory Control Theory and Practice”, Edition: 2, Prentice Hall of India , 1989.
3. K.K. Ahuja, “Material Management”, Edition: 1, CBS Publishing , 1992.
L T P C
MEC18R344 : NUCLEAR POWER GENERATION
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
To learn the nuclear power generation technique and its safety aspects.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Identify the different type of nuclear reactions and its applications.
CO2 Compare various nuclear reactors with working principle.
CO3 Summarize the various nuclear materials used for power generation.
CO4 Interpret the nuclear waste disposal process and its effects on environment.
CO5 Discuss the safety aspects to be followed in nuclear power plant.

CO1 3 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 1 2 1
CO4 2 2 2 2 1 2 1
CO5 2 2 3 3 2 2 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I: INTRODUCTION TO NUCLEAR ENGINEERING
Introduction, Why Nuclear Power for Developing Countries, Atomic Nuclei, Atomic Number and Mass
Number, Isotopes, Atomic Mass Unit, Radioactivity and Radioactive Change Rate of Radioactive Decay, Mass
– Energy Equivalence, Binding Energy, Release of Energy by Nuclear Reaction, Types of Nuclear Reactions,
Initiation of Nuclear Reaction, Nuclear Cross Section, Nuclear Fission, The Fission Chain Reaction,
Moderation, Fertile Materials and Breeding
Unit-II: NUCLEAR REACTORS

Introduction, General Components of Nuclear Reactor, General Problems of Reactor Operation, Different Types
of Reactors, Pressurised Water Reactors(PWR), Boiling Water Reactors (BWR), Heavy Water – cooled and
Moderated CANDU (Canadian Deuterium Uranium) Type Reactors, Gas-Cooled Reactors, Breeder Reactors,
Reactor Containment Design, Location of Nuclear Power Plant, Nuclear Power Station in India, India’s 3-stage
Programme for Nuclear Power Development Comparison Nuclear Plants with Thermal Plants.
Unit-III: NUCLEAR MATERIALS

Introduction, Fuels, Cladding and Materials Coolants, Moderating and Reflecting Materials, Control Rod
Materials, Shielding Materials.
Unit-IV: NUCLEAR WASTE & ITS DISPOSAL

Introduction, Unit of Nuclear Radiation, Types of Nuclear Waste, Effects of Nuclear Radiation, Radioactive
Waste Disposal System, Gas Disposal System.
Unit-V: SAFETY RULES

Personal Monitoring, Radiation Protection (Radiation Workers, Non-Radiation workers, Public at large),
Radiation Dose (Early effect, late effect hereditary effect)
Text Book(s):
1. P.K. Nag, “Power Plant Engineering”, Edition: 4, Tata McGraw Hill , 2017.
2. Arora & Domkundwar, “Power Plant Engineering”, Edition: 8, Dhanpat Rai & Co , 2016.
Reference(s):
1. S. Glasstone and A. Sesonske, “Nuclear Reactor Engineering”, Edition: 3, Von Nostrand , 1984.
2. J. Kenneth Shultis, R.E, Faw, “Fundamentals of Nuclear Science and Engineering”, Edition: 2, CRC
Press , 2008.
3. Tatjana Tevremovic, “Nuclear Principles in Engineering”, Edition: 1, Springer , 2008.
L T P C
MEC18R345 : SURFACE ENGINEERING
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
The aim of this course to understand the surface cleaning and coating technology
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Evaluate the aspects of surface engineering over a range of surface cleaning processes.
CO2 Identify the different type of resistant coatings deposited by electrochemical process.
Knowing the erosion, resistant coatings deposited by chemical vapour deposition and
CO3
physical vapour deposition.
CO4 Preparing corrosion resistant surfaces by plating and nano composite coatings.
CO5 Interpret the measurement of surfaces, wear mechanisms, tribological induced stresses.

CO1 3 1 2
CO2 2 3 1
CO3 2 2 1
CO4 2 3 1
CO5 2 2 2 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I: METAL CLEANING & PREVIEW ON SURFACE ENGINEERING
Need and relevance of surface engineering – pre-treatment of coating, General cleaning process for ferrous and
non-ferrous metals and alloys – selection of cleaning process – alkaline cleaning – emulsion cleaning- ultrasonic
cleaning – acid and pickling salt bath descaling – abrasive bath cleaning – polishing and short peening –
classification of surface engineering processes.
Unit-II: THERMAL SPRAYING PROCESSES AND ELECTRODEPOSITED

COATINGS
Thermal spraying – flame, arc, plasma and HVOF processes – PLV process – design for thermally sprayed
coatings – coating production – spray consumables principles of electroplating – Technology and control
electroplating systems – properties and Faraday’s Law – factors affecting throwing power – Applications of
electro deposit – non-aqueous and electro-less deposition.
Unit-III: HOT DIP COATING AND DIFFUSION COATINGS

Principles – surface preparation batch coating and continuous coating process – coating properties and
applications, Principles of cementation – cladding – Diffusion coating of C.N. Al, Si, Cr and B – structure,
properties and application of diffusion coatings – chemical vapour deposition – physical vapour deposition.
Unit-IV: NON-METALLIC COATING OXIDE &COVENSION COATINGS

Plating coating – rubbers and elastomers – vitreous enamels – anodizing phosphating and chromating –
application to aluminium, magnesium, tin, zinc, cadmium copper and silver – phosphating primers.
Unit-V: QUALITY ASSURANCE, TESTING & SELECTION OF COATINGS

The quality plan – design – testing and inspection of thickness adhesion, corrosion, resistance and porosity
measurement – selection of coatings – industrial applications of engineering coatings. Basic mechanisms of
wear – abrasive, adhesive wear, contact fatigue – fretting corrosion – testing wear resistance practical diagnosis
of wear.
Text Book(s):
1. Peter Martin, “Introduction to Surface Engineering and Functionally Engineered Materials”, Edition:
1, John Wiley & Sons , 2011.
2. S. Grainger, J. Blunt, “engineering coatings”, Edition: 2, Woodhead Publishing , 1994.
Reference(s):
1. N.V. Parthasarathy, “Electroplating Handbooks”, Edition: 2, Prentice Hall , 1992.
2. D.R. Gabe, “Principles of Metal surface treatment and protection”, Edition: 2, Pergamon , 1990.
3. Niku-Lavi, “Advances in surface treatments”, Edition: 1, Pergamon , 1990.
L T P C
MEC18R346 : THERMODYNAMICS OF MATERIALS
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
Classical and statistical thermodynamics; entropy and energy functions in liquid and solid solutions
and their applications to phase equilibrium
Course Outcome(s):
Familiarize the basic concepts of thermodynamics with both classical and statistical
CO1
approach.
CO2 Illustrate the thermal behavior of solid materials, including phase transitions.
CO3 Exploit thermodynamics to describe the thermal behavior of solid materials.
CO4 Interpret the acquired knowledge in the thermodynamic properties of materials.
Predict the use of thermodynamics in phase change material and interpret simple phase
CO5
equilibrium

CO1 2 1 1 2 2
CO2 2 1 2 2
CO3 2 1 2 2
CO4 2 1 1 2 2
CO5 2 2 1 2 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I: BASIC CONCEPT & LAWS OF THERMODYNAMICS
Heterogeneous & homogeneous systems, Extensive & intensive properties, Simple equilibrium, First law of
thermodynamics, constant volume & constant pressure processes, Spontaneous process, Entropy quantification
of irreversibility, Properties of heat engines, Second law of thermodynamics, Criterion for equilibrium, Entropy
& disorder, most probable microstate, configurational entropy & thermal entropy, Auxiliary functions
Unit-II: PROPERTIES OF PURE SUBSTANCES

Properties of pure substances – thermodynamic properties of pure substances in solid, liquid and vapour phases,
phase rule, P-V, P-T, T-V, T-S, H-S diagrams, PVT surfaces, and thermodynamic properties of steam
Unit-III: THERMODYNAMIC RELATIONS

Free energy functions and their relationships, Gibbs-Helmholtz relations, Maxwell relations, Clausius-
Clapeyron equation, importance of thermodynamics in materials science-illustrations and examples; applications
in areas of materials technology, industrial and process metallurgy
Unit-IV: THERMAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS

Specific heat - Debye and other models, heat capacity, thermal expansion, thermal conduction, thermal stress
and shock, melting point, advanced thermodynamic treatment of inorganic materials, Application of the laws of
thermodynamics to the chemical behavior of materials, multi component systems, phase and chemical reactions
equilibrium, Thermodynamics of phase transformations
Unit-V: PHASE CHANGE MATERIAL

Sensible –Latent heat energy, Types of Phase Change Material, Encapsulation, Composite PCM, Application of
Phase Change Material – Buildings, Air conditioning, Textiles, Solar water heating, Space heating/cooling,
Green house heating, Selection of PCM for application, Material testing, Method of Analysis
Text Book(s):
1. Y. V. C. Rao, “Introduction to Thermodynamics”, Edition: 2, Universities Press (India) Pvt. Ltd ,
2004.
2. A. Ghosh, “Textbook of Materials and Metallurgical Thermodynamics”, Edition: 1, PHI Publishers ,
2009.
Reference(s):
1. Cengel, “Thermodynamics – An Engineering Approach”, Edition: 8, Tata Mc Graw Hill , 2015.
2. R. Gaskell David, “Introduction to Metallurgical Thermodynamics”, Edition: 3, McGraw Hill , 1981.
3. R.H. 3. Tupkary, “Introduction to Metallurgical Thermodynamics”, Edition: 1, Tu Publishers , 1995.
L T P C
MEC18R347:3D PRINTING
3 0 0 3
Course Category:Open Elective
Pre-requisite:Nil
Course Type :Theory
The aim of this course is to make the students to understand the basic concepts and nuances of 3D
Printing Technology
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Outline the concepts behind the design consideration required for 3D printing.
Recognize the basic Knowledge in selecting the 3D Printing materials and their
CO2
applications.
CO3 Summarize the various types Inkjet technology and its working principles.
CO4 Contrast the Laser technology and its impact on 3D printing.
CO5 Interpret the appropriate method for designing and modeling Industrial applications.

CO1 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2
CO2 2 1 2 2 2
CO3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 1
CO4 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1
CO5 2 2 2 2 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I:INTRODUCTION
Introduction; Design considerations – Material, Size, Resolution, Process; Modeling and viewing - 3D;
Scanning; Model preparation – Digital; Slicing; Software; File formats
Unit-II:PRINCIPLE
Processes – Extrusion, Wire, Granular, Lamination, Photo polymerisation; Materials - Paper, Plastics, Metals,
Ceramics, Glass, Wood, Fiber, Sand, Biological Tissues, Hydrogels, Graphene; Material Selection - Processes,
applications, limitations
Unit-III:INKJET TECHNOLOGY
Printer - Working Principle, Positioning System, Print head, Print bed, Frames, Motion control; Print head
Considerations – Continuous Inkjet, Thermal Inkjet, Piezoelectric Drop-On-Demand; Material Formulation for
jetting; Liquid based fabrication – Continuous jet, Multi jet; Powder based fabrication – Color jet
Unit-IV:LASER TECHNOLOGY
Light Sources – Types, Characteristics; Optics – Deflection, Modulation; Material feeding and flow – Liquid,
powder; Printing machines – Types, Working Principle, Build Platform, Print bed Movement, Support
structures
Unit-V:INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS
Product Models, manufacturing – Printed electronics, Biopolymers, Packaging, Healthcare, Food, Medical,
Biotechnology, Displays; Open source; Future trends
Text Book(s):
1. Ian M. Hutchings, Graham D. Martin, “Inkjet Technology for Digital Fabrication”, Edition:1,John Wiley &
Sons,2013.
2. Christopher Barnatt, “3D Printing”, Edition:3,Create Space Independent Publishing Platform,2016.
Reference(s):
1. Christopher Barnatt, “3D Printing: The Next Industrial Revolution”, Edition:2,Create Space Independent
Publishing Platform,2014.
2. Ibrahim Zeid, “Mastering CAD CAM”, Edition:1,Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co,2007.
3. Joan Horvath, “Mastering 3D Printing”, Edition:1,A Press,2014.
L T P C
MEC18R348:MAINTENANCE ENGINEERING
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite:Nil
Course Type :Theory
The aim of undergoing this course is to understanding the basic topics in Maintenance Engineering
and its application in industry.
Course Outcome(s):
Elucidate the principles, functions and practices adapted in industry for the successful
CO1
management of maintenance activities.
CO2 Explain the concepts of Preventive maintenance and maintenance schedules.
Make use of Condition monitoring process with the simple instruments used in
CO3
Industry.
Ability to interpret the failures and implement the repair methods for basic machine
CO4
elements
CO5 Examine the failures and implement the repair methods for Material Handling Equipments.

CO1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1
CO2 2 1 1 2 1
CO3 1 1 2
CO4 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1
CO5 2 1 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I:PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES OF MAINTENANCE PLANNING
Basic Principles of maintenance planning – Objectives: and principles of planned maintenance activity –
Importance and benefits of sound Maintenance systems – Reliability and machine availability – MTBF, MTTR
and MWT – Factors of availability – Maintenance organization – Maintenance economics.
Unit-II:MAINTENANCE POLICIES – PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Maintenance categories – Comparative merits of each category – Preventive maintenance, maintenance
schedules, repair cycle - Principles and methods of lubrication – TPM
Unit-III:CONDITION MONITORING
Condition Monitoring – Cost comparison with and without CM – On-load testing and off-load testing –
Methods and instruments for CM – Temperature sensitive tapes – Pistol thermometers – wear- debris analysis
Unit-IV:REPAIR METHODS FOR BASIC MACHINE ELEMENTS

Repair methods for beds, slideways, spindles, gears, lead screws and bearings – Failure analysis – Failures and
their development – Logical fault location methods – Sequential fault location
Unit-V:REPAIR METHODS FOR MATERIAL HANDLING EQUIPMENT

Repair methods for Material handling equipment - Equipment records –Job order systems - Use of computers in
maintenance.
Text Book(s):
1. S.K. Srivastava, “Industrial Maintenance Management”, Edition:5,S. Chand and Co,1981.
2. S. N. Bhattacharya, “Installation, Servicing and Maintenance”, Edition:3,S. Chand and Co,1995.
Reference(s):
1. P Gopalakrishnan, A. K. Banerji, “Maintenance and Spare Parts Management”, Edition:1,Prentice Hall Of
India,2006.
2. Majumdar, “Pneumatic systems – Principles and maintenance”, Edition:2,Tata McGraw Hill,2001.
3. M. R. Garg, “Industrial Maintenance”, Edition:2,S. Chand and Co,2003.
L T P C
MEC18R349:SMART MATERIALS
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite:Nil
Course Type :Theory
The aim of undergoing this course is to develop basic principles and mechanisms of smart materials,
devices and provides a spring board for further study.
Course Outcome(s):
Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the physical principles underlying the
CO1
behaviour of smart materials.
Describe the basic principles and mechanisms of the stimuli-response for the most
CO2
important smart materials.
Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the engineering principles in smart sensors,
CO3
actuators and transducer technology.
Propose improvement and establishment of Smart composites on the design, analysis,
CO4
manufacturing and application issues.
Integrating smart materials and devices with signal processing and control capabilities to
CO5
engineering smart structures and products.

CO1 2 2 2 1 2 1
CO2 3 2 2 1 2 2
CO3 2 3 3 3 3 2 1
CO4 2 3 2 2 2 2
CO5 2 2 3 1 1 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I:OVERVIEW OF SMART MATERIALS
Introduction to Smart Materials, Principles of Piezoelectricty, Piezoceramic Materials, Single Crystals vs
Polycrystalline Systems, Piezoelectric Polymers, Principles of Magnetostriction,Rare earth Magnetostrictive
materials, Giant Magnetostriction and Magneto-resistance Effect, - Introduction to Electro-active Materials,
Electronic Materials, Electro-active Polymers, Ionic Polymer - Matrix Composite (IPMC)-Shape Memory
Alloys- Shape Memory Polymers- Shape Memory Effect-Electroactive polymers (EAP)-Work Volume
Generation
Unit-II:HIGH-BAND WIDTH-LOW STRAIN SMART MATERIALS

Piezoelectric materials-constitutive relationship, coupling coefficients, constants, materials, Variation of
coupling coefficients in hard and soft piezo-ceramics, polycrystalline vs single crystal piezoelectric materials,
polyvinyldene fluoride, piezoelectric composites- Sensors Magnetostrictive materials-constitutive relationship,
coupling coefficients, joule effect, villari effect, matteuci effect, wiedemann effect, gaint magnetostriction in
terfenol-d, terfenol-D particulate composites, galfenol and metglas materials- Sensors
Unit-III:DESIGN OF SMART ACTUATORS AND SENSORS

Actuator Techniques – Actuator and actuator materials – Piezoelectric and Electrostrictive Material –
Magnetostructure Material –– Finite Element Modelling- Optimal placement of sensors and actuators-
Piezoelectric Strain Sensors, In-plane and Out-of Plane Sensing, Shear Sensing, Accelerometers, Effect of
Electrode Pattern, Active Fibre Sensing, Magnetostrictive Sensing- design of controller for smart structure- case
study for advanced smart materials.
Unit-IV:SMART COMPOSITES
Review of Composite Materials, Micro and Macro-mechanics, Modelling Laminated Composites based on
Classical Laminated Plate Theory, Effect of Shear Deformation, Dynamics of Smart Composite Beam,
Governing Equation of Motion, and Finite Element Modelling of Smart Composite Beams.
Unit-V:DESIGN OF SMART SYSTEMS AND APPLICATIONS

Self-Sensing Piezoelectric Transducers, Energy Harvesting Materials, Artophagous Materials, Self-Healing
Polymers, Intelligent System Design, Emergent System Design– practical applications - case study
Text Book(s):
1. Mel Schwartz, “Smart Materials”, Edition:Click or tap here to enter text.,CRC Press,2008.
2. P. Gaudenzi, “Smart Structures”, Edition:Click or tap here to enter text.,Wiley,2009.
Reference(s):
1. R. Vepa, “Dynamics of Smart Structures”, Edition:Click or tap here to enter text.,Wiley,2010.
2. A.V. Srinivasan and D. M. McFarland, “Smart Structures, Analysis and Design”, Edition:Click or tap here
to enter text.,Cambridge University Press, New York,2001.
3. Brian Culshaw, “Smart Structures and Materials”, Edition:Click or tap here to enter text.,Artech
House,2000.
L T P C
MEC18R350:AVIONICS
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite:Nil
Course Type :Theory
The aim of undergoing this course is to impart fundamentals of avionics and the various systems
pertaining to avionics.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Illustrate the needs of various avionics systems and sub-systems.
CO2 Construct various avionics system architecture.
CO3 Demonstrate various technologies of flight decks and cockpits.
CO4 Categorize the navigation systems and sensors.
CO5 Elucidate the principles of autopilot and analyze various air data systems.

CO1 2 2 2 2 2
CO2 2 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3
CO4 2 3 3 2 2 3 2
CO5 3 2 1 2 2 3 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I:INTRODUCTION TO AVIONICS
Need for avionics in civil and military aircraft and space systems – Integrated avionics and weapon systems –
Typical avionics subsystems, design, technologies – Introduction to Digital Computer and memories.
Unit-II:DIGITAL AVIONICS ARCHITECTURE

Avionics system architecture – Data buses – MIL-STD-1553B – ARINC – 420 – ARINC – 629.
Unit-III:FLIGHT DECKS AND COCKPITS

Control and display technologies: CRT, LED, LCD, EL and plasma panel – Touch screen – Direct voice input
(DVI) – Civil and Military Cockpits: MFDS, HUD, MFK, HOTAS.
Unit-IV:INTRODUCTION TO NAVIGATION SYSTEMS

Radio navigation – ADF, DME, VOR, LORAN, DECCA, OMEGA, ILS, MLS – Inertial Navigation Systems
(INS) – Inertial sensors, INS block diagram – Satellite navigation systems – GPS.
Unit-V:AIR DATA SYSTEMS AND AUTO PILOT

Air data quantities – Altitude, Air speed, Vertical speed, Mach number, Total air temperature, Mach warning,
Altitude warning – Auto pilot – Basic principles, Longitudinal and lateral auto pilot.
Text Book(s):
1. Albert Helfrick, “Principles of Avionics”, Edition:7,Avionics Communications Inc,2012.
2. R. P. G. Collinson, “Introduction to Avionics”, Edition:2,Chapman and Hall,2013.
Reference(s):
1. Middleton, D. H. Ed, “Avionics Systems”, Edition:9,Longman Scientific and Technical, Longman Group
UK Ltd,1989.
2. C. R. Spitzer, “Digital Avionics Systems”, Edition:6,Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs,1993.
3. C. R. Spitzer, “The Avionics Hand Book”, Edition:1,CRC Press,2000.
L T P C
MEC18R403:MECHATRONICS
3 1 0 3
Pre-requisite:Nil
Course Type :Theory
The aim of undergoing this course is to educate students about an integrated approach for the design
of complex engineering systems and to provide knowledge of sensors, actuators and enabling the
students to apply the same in the real time problems.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Recognize the basic elements of Measurement and Control Systems.
CO2 Identify the various sensors and transducers for a wide range of mechanical applications
CO3 Make use of 8085 microprocessor for a variety of domestic and industrial applications.
CO4 Examine the function of Programmable Logic Controllers for Mechanical applications.
CO5 Build a Mechatronics system for domestic applications.

CO1 1 3 2 2 3
CO2 2 2 2 1 3 1 2 2
CO3 3 2 3 3 2
CO4 2 3 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I:INTRODUCTION TO MECHATRONICS
Introduction to Mechatronics systems - measurement systems-control systems-types-automatic control system-
microprocessor based control system- Introduction of bio mechanics, Bio-micro electrical mechanical system
Unit-II:SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS

Introduction-performance terminology-displacement, position and proximity-velocity and motion fluid pressure-
temperature sensors-light sensors-selection of sensors.
Unit-III:8085 MICROPROCESSOR
Introduction – architecture - pin configuration - instruction set - programming of microprocessors using
8085instructions-interfacing input and output devices-interfacing D/A converters and A/D converters
applications-temperature control-stepper motor control-traffic light controller-digital logic control-review of
number system-code conversion-Boolean algebra.
Unit-IV:PROGRAMMING LOGIC CONTROLLERS

Introduction-basic structure-input / output processing-programming - mnemonics-timers, internal relays and
counters-data handling-analog input/output-selection of a PLC.
Unit-V:DESIGN OF MECHATRONIC SYSTEMS

Stages in designing mechatronic systems - traditional and mechatronic design -possible design solutions-case
studies of mechatronic systems - pick and place robot - automatic car park system engine management system
Text Book(s):
1. W. Bolton, “Mechatronics”, Edition:4,Longman,2017.
2. Robert H Bishop, “Mechatronics: An Introduction”, Edition:1,Taylor and Francis,2006.
Reference(s):
1. Michael, B.H., and David, G.A, “Introduction to Mechatronics and measurement systems”,
Edition:2,McGraw Hill International Editions,1999.
2. Bradley, D.A., Dawson, D., Buru, N.C., and Loader, A.J., “Mechatronics”, Edition:1,Chapman and
Hall,1993.
3. Ram, K, “Fundamentals of Microprocessors and Microcomputers”, Edition:4,Dhanpat Rai
Publications,1999.
L T P C
MEC18R427:ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite:Nil
Course Type :Theory
The aim of undergoing this course is to provide an integrated and continuously updated view of core
business processes using common databases maintained by a database management system.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Define the concepts of ERP and its framework.
CO2 Explain the technologies and its architecture in CRM process
CO3 Apply the different types of activities of ERP project management cycle and packages
CO4 Analyze the application and various training module ERP packages
CO5 Evaluate the ERP Procedurement Issues in Indian companies.

CO1 3 3 3
CO2 3 1 1 2 2
CO3 1
CO4 3 2
CO5 3 1 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I:ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING
Principle – ERP framework – Business Blue Print – Engineering vs Business process Re Engineering – Tools –
Languages – Value chain – Supply and Demand chain – Extended supply chain management – Dynamic Models
– Process Models
Unit-II:TECHNOLOGY AND ARCHITECTURE

Client/Server architecture – Technology choices – Internet direction – Evaluation framework – CRM – CRM
pricing – chain safety – Evaluation framework.
Unit-III:ERP SYSTEM PACKAGES

SAP, People soft, Baan and Oracle – Comparison – Integration of different ERP applications – Before and after
Y2k – critical issues – Training on various modulus of IBCS ERP Package – Oracle ERP and MAXIMO,
including ERP on the NET
Unit-IV:ARCHITECTURE
Overview – Architecture – AIM – applications – Oracle SCM, SAP: Overview – Architecture – applications –
Before and after Y2k _ critical issues – Training on various modules of IBCS ERP Packages –Oracle ERP and
MAXIMO, including ERP on the NET
Unit-V:ERP PROCEDUREMENT ISSUES

Market Trends – Outsources ERP – Economics – Hidden Cost Issues – ROI – Analysis of cases from five
Indian Companies
Text Book(s):
1. Rajesh Ray, “Enterprise Resource Planning”, Edition:1,Text Mcgraw Hill,2011.
2. Sadagopan.S, “ERP-A Management Perspective”, Edition:4,Tata Mcgraw Hill,1999.
Reference(s):
1. Jose Antonio Fernandez, “The SAP R/3 Handbook”, Edition:1,Tata Mcgraw Hill,1998.
2. Vinod Kumar Crag and N.K. Venkitakrishnan, “Enterprise Resource Planning – Concepts and Practice”,
Edition:4,Prentice Hall of India,1998.
3. Garge & Venkitakrishnan, “, ERP Implementation Framework”, Edition:2,Prentice Hall,1999.
MEC18R428:PRODUCTIVITY MANAGEMENT AND RE- L T P C

ENGINEERING 3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite:Nil
Course Type :Theory
The aim of undergoing this course is to develop basics production operations and management and the
concepts and tools of re-engineering in production.
Course Outcome(s):
Explain the influencing factors of productivity and its cycle with the tools involved in its
CO1
measurement.
CO2 Summarize the different systematic approaches for productivity measurement.
CO3 Apply the concepts of organizational transformation and re-engineering.
CO4 Analyze and compare various models for process improvement.
CO5 Apply the analytical tools for re-engineering.

CO1 1 2 2 1
CO2 1 1 2 2
CO3 1 1 2 1 1 1
CO4 2 1 1 3 1 1 1 2 1
CO5 1 2 2 1 1 1 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I:PRODUCTIVITY
Productivity Concepts – Macro and Micro Factors of Productivity – Dynamics of Productivity – Productivity
Cycle Productivity at International, National and Organization Level – Productivity Measurement models
Unit-II:SYSTEM APPROACH TO PRODUCTIVITY MEASUREMENT

Conceptual frame work, Management by Objectives (MBO), Performance Objectives Productivity (POP) –
Methodology and application to manufacturing and service sector
Unit-III:ORGANISATIONAL TRANSFORMATION
Element of Organizational Transformation and Re-engineering – Principles of Organizational transformation
and re-engineering, fundamentals of process re-engineering, preparing the work force for transformation and
reengineering, methodology, guidelines, LMI CIP Model – DSMC Q & PMP model.
Unit-IV:RE-ENGINEERING PROCESS IMPROVEMENT MODELS

PMI models, PASIM Model, Moen and Nolan Strategy for process improvement, LMICIP Model, NPRDC
Model.
Unit-V:RE-ENGINEERING TOOLS AND IMPLEMENTATION

Analytical and process tools and techniques – information and communicational technology – implementation
of Re engineering project – success factor and common implementation problem – cases.
Text Book(s):
1. David J Sumanth, “Productivity Engineering and Management”, Edition:3,Tata Mcgraw Hill,1994.
2. Edosomwan, J.A, “Organizational Transformation and Process Reengineering”, Edition:1,Library
Cataloging in Pub. Data,1996.
Reference(s):
1. Rastogi, P.N, “Re – Engineering and Re- Inventing the Enterprise”, Edition:2,Wheeler Publications,1995.
2. B.S Sashay, Premvrat, Sardana, “Productivity Management – A Systems Approach”, Edition:1,Narosa
Publishing House,1996.
3. David J Sumanth, “TotaL Productivity Management”, Edition:1,Lucie Press,1997.
L T P C
MEC18R432:PRODUCT LIFE CYCLE MANAGEMENT
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite:NIL
Course Type :Theory
This course will enhance your knowledge and skills in the life cycle of industrial products and current
issues in the product portfolios according to global industry and market shifts.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Identify the import components and strategy of PLM.
CO2 Analysis the product life cycle management with various tools and techniques.
CO3 Explain the importance and workflow of PDM.
CO4 Summarize the various product analysis tools used in PLM.
CO5 Interpret the recent advancement in PLM and its applications.

CO1 2 2 1 2 3 1
CO2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 3
CO3 2 2 1 2 2
CO4 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2
CO5 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I:INTRODUCTION TO PRODUCT LIFE CYCLE MANAGEMENT(PLM)
Background, Overview, Need, Benefits, Concept of Product Life Cycle. Components of PLM, Emergence of
PLM, Significance of PLM, Customer Involvement, Product Data and Product Workflow, Company’s PLM
vision, The PLM Strategy, Principles for PLM strategy, Preparing for the PLM strategy, Strategy identification
and selection, Change Management for PLM.
Unit-II:CONSTRUCTING PRODUCT LIFE CYCLE MANAGEMENT

PLM Life cycle model – Plan, design, build, support & dispose. Threads of PLM- Computer Aided
Design(CAD), Engineering Data Management(EDM). Product Data Management(PDM). Computer Integrated
Manufacturing(CIM). Weaving the threads in to PLM, Comparison of PLM to Engineering Resource
Planning(ERP). PLM characteristics-Singularity, Cohesion, Traceability, Reflectiveness.
Unit-III:PRODUCT DATA MANAGEMENT (PDM) PROCESS AND WORKFLOW

PDM systems and importance, reason for implementing a PDM system, financial justification of PDM
implementation. Versioning, check-in and checkout, views, Metadata, Lifecycle, and workflow. Applied
problems and solution on PDM processes and workflow.
Unit-IV:PRODUCT ANALYSIS TOOLS

Design for manufacturing - machining - casting and metal forming - optimum design - Design for assembly and
disassembly - probabilistic design concepts - FMEA - QFD - Taguchi Method for design of experiments -
Design for product life cycle. Estimation of Manufacturing costs, Reducing the component costs and assembly
costs, Minimize system complexity.
Unit-V:RECENT ADVANCES IN PLM

Intelligent Information Systems - Knowledge based product and process models - Applications of soft
computing in product development process. Digital manufacturing, benefits manufacturing, manufacturing the
first-one, Ramp up, virtual learning curve, manufacturing the rest, production planning.
Text Book(s):
1. Michael Grieves, “Product Lifecycle Management”, Edition:1,McGraw-Hill,2005.
2. Rodger Burden, “PDM: Product Data Management”, Edition:1,Resource Pub,2003.
Reference(s):
1. John StarkProduct Life Cycle Management”, Edition:3 Springer ,2016.
2. Antti Saaksvuori , Anselmi Immonen , “Product Lifecycle Management”, Edition:3,Springer2010.
3. 3. Fabio Guidice, Guido La Rosa, “Product Design for the environment- A life cycle approach”,
Edition:3,Taylor and Francis,2006.
L T P C
MEC18R440:BASIC MACHINING
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite:Nil
Course Type :Theory
The aim of undergoing this course is to develop basic understanding of the topics in Mechanical
Engineering
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Summarize the various metal cutting tools and its nomenclature.
Discuss the features, operations of Centre lathe, Capstan and turret lathe and automatic
CO2
lathe.
CO3 Illustrate the various processes involved in milling machines.
CO4 Describe the principles of Gear Cutting machines.
CO5 Interpret the concepts involved in Abrasive and Broaching Processes.

CO1 3 2 2 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO2 3 2 2 2 2 1 3 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 2 1 3 2
CO4 3 2 2 2 2 1 2 3 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 3 1 1 3 2 3
Course Topics:
Unit-I:METAL CUTTING THEORY
Mechanics of chip formation, single point and multi point cutting tools, forces in machining, Types of chip,
cutting tools – nomenclature, orthogonal metal cutting, thermal aspects, cutting tool materials, tool wear, tool
life, surface finish, cutting fluids and machinability, economics in machining.
Unit-II:TURNING MACHINES
Centre lathe, constructional features, specification, operations – taper turning methods, thread cutting methods,
special attachments, machining time and power estimation. Capstan and turret lathes- tool layout – automatic
lathes: semi automatic – single spindle: Swiss type, automatic screw type – multi spindle
Unit-III:RECIPROCATING, MILLING MACHINES

Reciprocating machine tools: shaper, planer, slotter: Types and operations- Hole making: Drilling, reaming,
boring, Tapping, Milling operations-types of milling cutter –attachments machining time calculations.
Unit-IV:GEAR CUTTING MACHINES

Gear cutting – forming and generation principle, gear milling, hobbing and gear shaping – micro finishing
methods
Unit-V:ABRASIVE AND BROACHING PROCESSES

Abrasive processes: grinding wheel – specifications and selection, types of grinding process – cylindrical
grinding, surface grinding, centreless grinding, internal grinding- micro finishing methods - Typical applications
– concepts of surface integrity, broaching machines: broach construction – push, pull, surface and continuous
broaching machines
Text Book(s):
1. P.N. Rao, “Manufacturing Technology – Vol 2,” Metal Cutting and Machine Tools”, Edition:1,Tata
McGrawHill,2013.
2. Hajra Choudhury, “Elements of Workshop Technology ”, Edition:13,Media Promoters & Publishers,2010.
Reference(s):
1. Richerd R kibbe, John E. Neely, Roland O.Merges and Warren J.White, “Machine Tool Practices”,
Edition:10,Prentice Hall,2014.
2. HMT, “Production Technology”, Edition:1,Tata Mc Graw Hill,2001.
3. GeofreyBoothroyd, “Fundamentals of Metal Machining and Machine Tools”, Edition:1,McGraw Hill,1984.
L T P C
MEC18R441:SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite:Nil
Course Type :Theory
The aim of undergoing this course is to develop basic understanding the topics in the field of
management and engineering goods.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Illustrate the various functions of supply chain network and customer strategies.
Recognize the need of decision making in supply chain management and its build-up
CO2
techniques.
Summarize the concept of supply chain management, uncertainty in supply chain and
CO3
material handling procurement.
Interpret the role of transportation in supply chain with decision support models and supply
CO4
management.
Reproduce the concepts in supply chain automation and distribution policies and plans in
CO5
IT sectors.

CO1 2 1 2 2 1 2
CO2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2
CO3 2 2 2 2 1 1 2
CO4 2 1 1
CO5 2 1 1 1 2 2 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I:INTRODUCTION
Building Blocks of a Supply Chain Network - Business Processes In Supply Chains - Types of Supply Chains
and Examples – Supply Chain Drivers- Role of Supply Chain Management- Scope and Importance.-Customer
Driver Strategies.
Unit-II:SUPPLY CHAIN INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

Strategic, Tactical, and Operational Decisions in Supply Chains - Supply Chain Performance Measures - Supply
Chain Inventory Management – Demand Forecasting – Impact of Uncertainty of Supply In Safety Inventory –
Managing Safety Inventory In Multi Echelon Supply Chains - Bullwhip Effect Ware house Design-Distribution
Policies- Transhipment Information Systems-Planning And Managing Inventories In A Supply Chain
Unit-III:SOURCING DECISION IN SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

Role of Sourcing – In-House Sourcing and Outsourcing – Third Party Logistics – Supplier Relation –
Procurement Processes – Risk Management In Sourcing-, Inventory-Order Processing- Purchasing Ware
housing- Materials Handling- Packaging-Customer Service Management--Impact of Supply Uncertainty
Aggregation And Replenishment.
Unit-IV:TRANSPORTATION IN SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

Role of Transportation – Modes – Design Option For A Transportation Network – Trade Off In Transportation
Design- Logistics and Competitive Strategy; System View, Co-Ordination and Management of Transportation-
International Logistics-Ocean Carrier Management- Import Export Logistic Management- Decision Support
Models Of Supply Chain Management.
Unit-V:SUPPLY CHAIN AUTOMATION AND ITS ADVANCEMENT

IT Enabled Supply Chains – Role of IT in Forecasting, Inventory Management, Procurement, Transportation -
Customer Relationship Management - ERP and Supply Chains - Supply Chain Automation and Supply Chain
Integration-- Marketing and Supply Chain Interface-Finance and Supply Chain Interface-Distribution Policies
and Plans-Revenue Management.
Text Book(s):
1. Michael H. Hugos, “Essentials of Supply Chain Management”, Edition:3,John Wley & Sons,2011.
2. Martin Christopher., “Logistics & Supply Chain Management”, Edition:5,Pearon UK,2016.
Reference(s):
1. N. Viswanadham and Y. Narahari, “Performance Modeling of Automated manufacturing Systems”,
Edition:1,Prentice Hall of India,1998.
2. R.B. Handfield and E.L. Nochols, Jr, “Introduction to Supply Chain Management”, Edition:5,Prentice
Hall,1999.
3. 5. Charlie Chen, Richard E. Crandall, and William R. Crandall, “Principles of Supply Chain
Management”, Edition:2,CRC Press,2014.
L T P C
MEC18R442:BASICS OF HEAT TRANSFER
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite:Click or tap here to enter Course Category:Choose an item.
text. Course Type :Theory
Enable the students to understand the basic concepts of heat transfer
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Apply knowledge on conduction heat transfer and perform its calculations.
CO2 Solve forced convection real time problems
CO3 Solve free convection real time problems
CO4 Examine the factors influencing radiation heat transfer
CO5 Analyze the performance of the heat exchangers

CO1 1 2 2 2 1 1
CO2 2 1 1 1 1
CO3 2 1 1 1 1
CO4 2 1 1 1 1
CO5 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I:CONDUCTION
Introduction to Heat Transfer, Modes of Heat Transfer, Material properties of importance in heat transfer,
Thermal conductivity, Specific heat capacity, One Dimensional:-Steady state conduction through wall, cylinder
and sphere. Thermal contact resistance, Heat conduction in bodies with heat sources, Fins. Unsteady state Heat
conduction- Lumped System Analysis
Unit-II:FORCED CONVECTION
Basic Concepts – Convective Heat Transfer Coefficients- Types of Convection – Forced Convection -
Dimensionless numbers and their physical significance- Thermal and Hydrodynamic boundary layer-External
Flow – Flow over Plates, Cylinders and Spheres- Internal flow - Laminar and turbulent flows
Unit-III:FREE CONVECTION
Basic Concepts – Dimensionless numbers and their physical significance- Flow over Vertical Plate, Flow over
vertical pipe, Flow over Horizontal Plate, Flow over Horizontal pipe Inclined Plate, Flow over Cylinders and
Spheres.
Unit-IV:RADIATION
Absorptivity, reflectivity and transmissivity, black, white and grey body, emissive power and emissivity,
laws of radiation – Planck, Stefan-Boltzmann, Wein’s displacement, Kirchhoff’s law,
Lambert’s cosine law Radiation heat exchange between black bodies, Radiation Shields, irradiation
Unit-V:HEAT EXCHANGER
Classification, heat exchanger analysis, LMTD for parallel and counter flow exchanger, condenser and
evaporator, overall heat transfer coefficient, fouling factor, effectiveness and number of transfer unit for parallel
and counter flow heat exchanger, introduction of heat pipe and compact heat exchanger
Text Book(s):
1. R.C. Sachdeva , “Fundamentals of Engineering Heat and Mass Transfer”, Edition:5,New Age International
Publishers,2017.
2. R.Yadav, “Heat and Mass Transfer”, Edition:4,CentralPublishingHouse,1995.
Reference(s):
1. Frank, P., Incropera and David, P. D, “Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer”, Edition:7,John Wiley
publication,2017.
2. M.N.Ozisik, “Heat Transfer”, Edition:3,Mc Graw Hill BookCo,1994.
3. C. P. KothandaramaN, “Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer”, Edition:5,New Age International
Publishers,2016.
L T P C
MEC18R443 : AUTOMATIC GUIDED VEHICLE
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
To understand the application of AGVS in industry in order to optimize the material flows and their
variety of uses and the technological standards that are available at present.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Identify the evolving history of AGVS and their use.
Recognize the applications of AGVS in modern day’s industries and their advantages in
CO2
reducing human effort.
CO3 Describe the technological standards to meet the customer needs accordingly.
CO4 Illustrate the use of AS/RS and learn its designing methods.
CO5 Identify the AGVS requirements for sustaining in the future challenges.

CO1 1 1 1
CO2 1 2 1 1
CO3 1 2 1
CO4 1 2 2 2
CO5 1 1 1 2 1 2 1
Course Topics:
Introduction to AGV – Evolution of AGV – Vehicle guidance technology – Vehicle management and safety -
Benefits of AGV’s - Important issues for AGVS – Navigation.
Unit-II: MODERN AREAS OF APPLICATION

Flow Line Organization and the Focus on Series Production -Warehousing and Commissioning – Industry
related Aspects and Examples - Paper Manufacturing and Processing- Steel Making Industry.
Unit-III: TECHNOLOGICAL STANDARDS

Navigation and Safety- AGVS Guidance Control - AGV Categories: towing vehicle, unit load carriers, pallet
trucks, forklift trucks, light-load transporters, assembly-line vehicles- AGVS Environment.
Unit-IV: AUTOMATED STORAGE AND RETRIEVAL SYSTEM

Definition of AS/RS - Functions of AS/RS - Components and Terminology – Types - Design of AS/RS – AGV
Interfacing with other subsystems –Conventional storage methods and equipments.
Unit-V: FUNCTIONAL CHALLENGES FOR THE AGVS OF THE FUTURE

Drive Safe: Integration of Navigation and Safety - Automated Togetherness: Acting Intelligently - Energy Mix:
Modern Energy Management - Market Development - Case studies.
Text Book(s):
1. Guntur Ullrich, “Automated Guided Vehicle Systems - A primer with practical applications”, Edition:
2, Springer publications , 2014.
2. M.P. Groover, “Automation, Production Systems, and Computer-Integrated Manufacturing”, Edition:
4, Pearson Education , 2015.
Reference(s):
1. T. Muller, “Automated Guided Vehicle Systems: No. 2: International Conference Proceedings”,
Edition: 1, IFS Ltd , 1983.
2. Siddharta Ray, “’Introduction to Materials Handling”, Edition: 2, New Age International (P) Ltd.,
Publishers , 2017.
3. Stephen Cameron, Penelope Probert, “Advanced guided vehicles : aspects of the Oxford AGV Project”,
Edition: 1, World Scientific Publishers , 1994.
L T P C
MEC18R445 : APPLIED THERMODYNAMICS
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: MEC18R202/ Course Category: Open Elective
Thermodynamics Course Type : Theory
To enable the students to understand the basic principles and concepts of classical thermodynamics
and apply it to various systems & analyse the performance various cycles
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Illuminate the basic concepts of thermodynamics and zeroth and first laws.
CO2 Interpret the idea of second law of thermodynamics to elaborate simple systems.
CO3 Execute the performance of some gas power cycles.
CO4 Comprehend the properties of pure substances.
CO5 Analyze the performance of vapour power cycles.

CO1 1 2 2 2 1
CO2 2 2 2 2 1
CO3 2 2 1 1
CO4 2 1 2 2 1
CO5 2 2 2 2 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I: BASIC CONCEPT, FIRST LAW
Classical approach, concept of continuum, thermodynamic systems - closed, open and isolated. First law of
thermodynamics for open and closed systems
Unit-II: SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS

Second law of thermodynamics – Kelvin’s and Clausius statements of second law, Reversibility and
irreversibility, Carnot theorem, Carnot cycle, reversed carnot cycle, efficiency, COP.
Unit-III: GAS POWER CYCLES

Otto, Diesel, Dual cycle- Calculation of mean effective pressure, and air standard efficiency
Unit-IV: PROPERTIES OF PURE SUBSTANCE

Properties of pure substances – thermodynamic properties of pure substances in solid, liquid and vapour phases,
phase rule, P-V, P-T, T-V, T-S, H-S diagrams, PVT surfaces, thermodynamic properties of steam
Unit-V: VAPOUR POWER CYCLE

Standard Rankine cycle - Performance, comparison between Rankine and Carnot cycle, Reheat and
regenerative cycle, combined cycle.
Text Book(s):
1. P.K. Nag, “Engineering Thermodynamics”, Edition: 6, Tata McGraw-Hill Co. Ltd , 2017.
2. Y.A.Cengel, “Thermodynamics – An Engineering Approach”, Edition: 8, Tata Mc Graw Hill , 2017.
Reference(s):
1. E. Radhakrishnan, “Fundamentals of Engineering thermodynamics”, Edition: 2, Prentice hall , 2005.
2. J.P. Holman, “Thermodynamics”, Edition: 4, McGraw-Hill , 2015.
3. Vanwlen and Sontag, “Classical Thermodynamics”, Edition: 4, john wiley , 2000.
L T P C
MEC18R446 : INDUSTRIAL PSYCHOLOGY
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
The aim of undergoing this course develop an awareness of the major perspectives underlying the
field of Industrial Psychology and understanding for the potential Industrial Psychology has for
society and organizations now and in the future.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Outline the key concepts, theoretical perspectives, and trends in industrial psychology.
CO2 Identify the problems present in environment and design a job analysis method.
CO3 Create a better work environment for better performance.
CO4 Explain various work methods and improve efficiency at work.
CO5 Examine the factors of job design and discuss about Accidents and safety.

CO1 1 2 2 2 2 1
CO2 1 2 2 3 1
CO3 1 2 2 2 3 2 1 2
CO4 2 2 2 2 2 2 3
CO5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Course Topics:
The role of the psychologist in industry, the field of occupational Psychology - Study of behaviour in work
situation and applications of Psychological principles to problems of selection, Placement, Counseling and
training.
Unit-II: DESIGN OF WORK ENVIRONMENTS

Human engineering and physical environment techniques of job analysis, Social environment- Group dynamics
in Industry Personal psychology - Selection, training, placement, promotion, counseling, job motivations, job
satisfaction. Special study of problem of fatigue, boredom and accidents.
Unit-III: UNDERSTANDING CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR

Consumer behaviour, study of consumer preference, effects of advertising, Industrial morale - the nature and
scope of engineering psychology, its application to industry.
Unit-IV: WORK METHODS

Efficiency at work, the concept of efficiency, the work curve, its characteristics - The work methods; hours of
work, nature of work, fatigue and boredom, rest pauses. The personal factors; age abilities, interest, job
satisfaction The working environment - noise, illumination, atmospheric conditions - Increasing efficiency at
work; improving the work methods, Time and motion study, its contribution and failure resistance to time
and motion studies, need for allowances in time and motion study.
Unit-V: WORK AND EQUIPMENT DESIGN

Criteria in evaluation of job-related factor, job design, human factors, Engineering information, input processes,
mediation processes, action processes, methods design, work space and its arrangement, human factors in job
design. Accident and Safety - The human and economic costs of accidents, accident record and statistics, the
causes of accidents situational and individual factors related to accident reduction.
Text Book(s):
1. J. Tiffin and E.J. McCormic , “Industrial Psychology”, Edition: 6, Prentice Hall , 1975.
2. E.J. McCormic , “Human Factors engineering and design”, Edition: 4, McGraw Hill , 1976.
Reference(s):
1. Gilmer, “Industrial Psychology”, Edition: 2, McGraw-Hill , 1966.
2. Ghiselli& Brown, “Personnel and Industrial Psychology”, Edition: 1, McGraw-Hill Book Company ,
1955.
3. Myer, “Industrial Psychology”, Edition: 1, Digitalpublication , 2005.
L T P C
MEC18R447 : PROCESS EQUIPMENT AND DESIGN
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
The aim of undergoing this course is to develop basic knowledge of the topics in Engineering
drawing. Knowledge of Heat Transfer, Mass Transfer, Mechanical Operations and Mechanical
Equipment Design.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Understand the significance of process design parameters, codes used in industries.
CO2 Design cylindrical and spherical vessels as per design standards.
CO3 Identify the suitable process for design considering different mechanical aspects.
CO4 Understand the fundamental aspects of piping and also design for various applications.
CO5 Enumerate various safety measures considered for designing mass transfer column.

CO1 1 3 1
CO2 1 2 3 2
CO3 1 2 3 2
CO4 1 2 3 2
CO5 1 3 3 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I: PROCESS DESIGN PARAMETERS
Introduction to Basic process requirement of plants and projects, Importance of codes and standards and their
applications. P&ID, Process Data Sheet, PFD, Introduction to various design codes required in Process
Equipment Design such as; ASME, Section VIII; API; ASTM; TEMA and their significance, factor of safety,
corrosion allowance, weld joints efficiency, design loading, stress concentration and thermal stresses, failure
criteria.
Unit-II: DESIGN OF CYLINDRICAL AND SPHERICAL VESSELS

Types of various welding analysis - Thin and thick walled cylinder analysis, design of end closers, local stresses
due to discontinuity, Design of standard and non-standard flanges, design of vessels and pipes under external
pressure.
Unit-III: PROCESS OF EQUIPMENT DESIGN

Storage vessels, reaction vessels, agitation and mixers, heat exchangers, filters and driers, centrifuges. Code
practices, selection and specification procedures used in design. Selection of pumps, compressors, electrical
equipment auxiliary services and safety.
Unit-IV: PROCESS OF PIPING DESIGN

Flow diagrams and pipe work symbols, steam and compressed air pipes work, pipe fitting, linings and flanged
connections. Types of valves used on pipe line. Fabrication of pipe lines, expansion joints and pipe supports.
Unit-V: DESIGN AND SAFETY MEASURES OF MASS TRANSFER COLUMN

Design of distillation and absorption column - Stresses in column shell - Design and construction features of
column internals. Process Hazards, Safety measures, Safety measures in equipment design, Pressure relief
devices.
Text Book(s):
1. M.V.Joshi and V.V. Mahajan, “Process Equipment Design”, Edition: 3, MacMillan India Ltd , 2016.
2. S.D.Dawande, “Process Design of Equipments”, Edition: 3, Central Techno Publications , 2000.
Reference(s):
1. L. E. Brownell, E. H. Youg, “Process Equipment Design”, Edition: 1, John Wiley & Sons Publications
, 2004.
2. J.M. Coulson and J. Richardson, “Chemical Engineering”, Edition: 3, Asian Books Printers Ltd ,
2002.
3. R.H. Perry, “Chemical Engineers’ Handbook”, Edition: 8, McGraw-Hill , 2008.
HSS18R001 : MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS AND L T P C
TECHNIQUES 3 0 0 3
Course Category: Humanities Elective
Pre-requisite: Nil
This course addresses the definition of management, its characteristics, evolution and importance as
well as the functions performed by manages-planning, organizing, directing and controlling. The course
also intends to show students the applications of management functions in various enterprises such as
marketing, finance, personnel, production, etc.
Course Outcome(s):
Explain the historical backdrop and fundamentals of Management thoughts vital for
CO1
understanding the conceptual frame work of Management as a discipline
Discuss about the various concepts of planning, Decision making and controlling to help
CO2
solving managerial problems
CO3 Understanding concepts of Ethics, Delegation, Coordination and Team work
CO4 Study and understand the management concepts and styles in Global context
CO5 Develop an understanding about emerging concepts in management thought and philosophy

CO1 2 2 1 2
CO2 2 2 2 1 1 2
CO3 1 1 3 3 2 1
CO4 2 3 2 1 2
CO5 2 3 3
Course Topics:
Unit-I: DEVELOPMENT OF MANAGEMENT THOUGHTS
Scientific Management Movement - Administrative Movement - Human Relations Movement -Decision
Movement - Behavioural Science Movement - Systems Movement - Contingency Movement.
Unit-II: ESSENTIALS OF PLANNING

Planning Objectives – Goals - Programmed Decisions and Unprogrammed Decisions; Decision – Making -
Creativity in Decision - Making, Forecasting and Strategy to Formulation
Unit-III: EFFECTIVE ORGANISING

Span of Control – Departmentation - Authority; Responsibility - Bureaucracy and Adhocracy; Group Dynamics
Unit-IV: STAFFING AND DIRECTING

Staffing: Manpower Planning – Recruitment Sources – Selection Procedure – Training Methods – Performance
Evaluation Methods – Executive Development Programs - Directing: Communication Process and Barriers –
Motivation Techniques – Financial and Non – Financial Motivation- Leadership Qualities and Styles
Unit-V: CONTROLLING AND RECENT CONCEPTS
Controlling: Meaning and Process - Requisites of Effective Control - Control Techniques. Emerging Issues in
Management: Japanese and American Management – Management by Objectives – Knowledge Management –
Technology Management – Business Process Outsourcing- Social Responsibility and Business Ethics
Text Book(s):
1. Harold Koontz, Heinz Weihrich, “Essentials of Management: An International, Innovation and
Leadership Perspective”, Edition: 10, McGraw Hill , 2016.
2. Stephen P. Robbins, Mary A. Coulter, “Management”, Edition: 13, Pearson Education Limited , New
Delhi, 2016.
Reference(s):
1. C.B.Gupta, “Management Theory and Practice”, Edition: 19, Sultan Chand and Sons , 2017.
2. L.M.Prasad, “Principles and Practices of Management”, Edition: 9, Sultan Chand and Sons , 2015.
3. K.Aswathappa, “Essentials of Business Environment: Text Cases and Exercises”, Edition: 12,
Himalaya Publishing House , Mumbai, 2014.
L T P C
HSS18R002 : MARKETING MANAGEMENT
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
This course develops students understanding of how organizations match the requirements of
consumers in competitive environments, and develop strategies to create the competitive edge. It covers
areas such as analysis, planning, implementation, and control, as well as the marketing mix, exportation,
and the social aspects of marketing.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Develop understanding of marketing concepts, philosophies and historical background
Develop understanding of marketing operations and complexities for students to apply in
CO2
practical business situations
Understand concepts related to Segmentation, Targeting and Positioning, product attributes,
CO3
and pricing strategies prevalent in domestic and international scenario
CO4 Interpret various tools and techniques of promoting the products in ethical manner
CO5 Understand emerging concepts of marketing in the emerging global markets

CO1 2 2 1 1 2
CO2 2 2 2 1 1 2
CO3 2 1 3 2
CO4 2 3 2 3 1 1 2
CO5 2 3 3 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I: MARKETING
Meaning - concept - functions - marketing Planning and implementation marketing Programmes - Marketing
environment – Market Segmentation and consumer behaviour – Influencing factors, Decision process –Marketing
mix – Marketing department
Unit-II: PRODUCT
Meaning - Product planning - policies - positioning - New product development Product life cycle – BCG Matrix
- branding. Packing, labelling
Unit-III: PRICING
Pricing objectives – Setting and modifying the price – Different pricing method Product line pricing and new
product pricing
Unit-IV: DISTRIBUTION
Nature of Marketing channels - Types of Channel flows – Channel functions - Channel co-operation, conflict and
competition - Direct Marketing Telemarketing, Internet shopping
Unit-V: PROMOTION
Promotion Mix - Advertisement - Message - copy writing – Advertisement - budgeting - Measuring advertisement
effectiveness - Media strategy - sales promotion - Personal selling steps, publicity and direct marketing
Text Book(s):
1. Philip. T. Khotler, Kevin Lane, “Marketing Management”, Edition: 15, Pearson Education , New
Delhi, 2016.
2. V.S. Ramaswamy, S. Namakumari, “Marketing Management – Global Perspective”, Edition: 1, Indian
Context, McGraw Hill , 2013.
Reference(s):
1. Rajan Saxena, Dorector, S. P. Jain, “Marketing Management”, Edition: 1, McGraw Hill , 2006.
2. K.S. Chandrasekar, “Marketing Management”, Edition: 1, Text and Cases, McGraw hill , 2013.
L T P C
HSS18R003 : ORGANISATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
This course aims to clarify the principles and basic concepts of organizational psychology. Including
organizations and understanding its business design based on efficiency and quality of employee life.
It also aims at enhancing the quality of life of employees. When organization’s aspects are gauged in
terms of psychological assessment, personnel decisions in line with training and development,
organizational change and organizational health in specific the intrinsic problems are understood paving
way towards standards that are high.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Interpret basic concepts of industrial and organizational psychology
Illustrate different ways of achieving organizational effectiveness through individual
CO2
behaviour
Understand the concepts relating to individual behaviour to achieve group target and
CO3
achieve leadership position in organisation
Understand the organisational changes and means to evaluate based on nature of
CO4
organisations
CO5 Inspect the implications of changes aligning the interest of individual, group and organisation

CO1 2 1 2
CO2 2 1 1 2 2 2
CO3 1 1 2 3
CO4 2 1 1 1 1 1 2
CO5 2 1 1 1 1 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I: FOCUS AND PURPOSE
Organisational Behaviour - Need and importance, nature and scope, framework
Unit-II: INDIVIDUAL BEHAVIOUR

Personality – types – factors influencing personality – theories – learning – types of learners – learning theories –
organizational Behaviour modification. Attitudes – characteristics –components – formation – measurement.
Perceptions – importance – factors influencing perception – interpersonal perception
Unit-III: GROUP BEHAVIOUR

Pricing objectives – Setting and modifying the price – Different pricing method Product line pricing and new
product pricing
Unit-IV: LEADERSHIP
Leadership styles – theories – Qualities - leaders Vs managers – sources of power – power centres – power and
Organisational Politics- Motivation
Unit-V: ORGANISATIONAL DEVELOPMENT
Organizational development - Importance, characteristics, objectives, stability Vs change, proactive vs reaction
change, the change process, resistance to change, managing change, team building - Organizational effectiveness,
perspective, effectiveness Vs efficiency, approaches, the time dimension, achieving organizational effectiveness
Text Book(s):
1. Stephen Probing, Timothy A. Judge, “Organisational Behavior”, Edition: 17, Pearson Education ,
2017.
2. Fred Luthans, “, Organisational Behavior”, Edition: 12, McGraw Education , 2010.
Reference(s):
1. Aswathappa, “Organisational Behavior”, Edition: 12, Himalaya Publishing House , 2016.
2. P.Subba Rao, “ Management and Organisational behavior: Text, Cases and Games Edition: 1,
Himalaya Publishing House , 2010.
3. Mullins, “Organisational Behavior”, Edition: 9, Pearson Education Limited , 2010.
L T P C
HSS18R004 : PROJECT MANAGEMENT
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
This course describes concepts relating to project management and enable students to evolve project
objectives appropriately with relevance to business proposals. It covers the required dimensions relating
to evaluation of project by testing the technical feasibility, financial viability, market acceptability and
social desirability of projects. It gives an account on risk and profitability analysis that facilitates the
making of the effective project proposal and guides learners in project planning, implementation and
control. It also emancipates the scope of project management in undertaking foreign collaboration
projects
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Familiarizes the concept of project and steps in project management
CO2 Understand the basics stages involved in preparing business proposals
Evaluate the technical feasibility, financial viability, market acceptability and social
CO3
desirability of projects.
CO4 Enabled to analyse the Risk and profitability of the project proposals
CO5 Act effectively as project managers and as part of project teams

CO1 2 1 1 2 3 1 2
CO2 2 2 1 3 3 1 2
CO3 1 3 1 1 1 3
CO4 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 1 2
CO5 2 2 1 3 1 1 1 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I: INTRODUCTION TO PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Projects - Project ideas and preliminary screening. Developments - Project planning to Project completion - Pre-
investment phase, Investment phase, operational phase - Governmental Regulatory framework. Capital Budgeting
Unit-II: STAGES OF PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Opportunity studies - prefeasibility studies, functional studies or support studies, feasibility study expansion
projects, data for feasibility study. Market and Technical Appraisal: Market and Demand analysis, Market Survey,
Demand forecasting. Technical analysis- Materials and inputs, Choice of Technology, Product mix, Plant location,
capacity, Machinery and equipment
Unit-III: APPRAISAL PROCESS

Concepts. Time value of money - Present and future value. Appraisal criteria - Urgency, Payback period, Rate of
return, Debt service coverage ratio, Net present value, Benefit cost ratio, Internal rate of return, Annual capital
charge, Investment appraisal in practice
Unit-IV: RISK AND PROFITABILITY ANALYSIS
Risk analysis- Measures of risk, Sensitivity analysis, and Decision tree analysis. Means of financing, Term Loans,
Financial Institutions. Cost of capital. Profitability - Cost of Production, Break-even analysis. Assessing the tax
burden and financial projections
Unit-V: PROJECT PLANNING, IMPLEMENTATION AND CONTROL

Forms of Project Organization, Project Planning, Implementation, and Control - Network construction, CPM,
PERT, Development of Project schedule, Crashing of Project Network. Introduction to Foreign collaboration
projects - Governmental policy framework, Need for foreign technology, Royalty payments, Foreign investments
and procedural aspects
Text Book(s):
1. Prasanna Chandra, “Projects: Planning, Analysis, Selection, Financing, Implementation”, Edition: 8,
McGraw Hill , 2014.
2. M.R. Gopalan, “Project Management Core Textbook”, Edition: 2, Wiley India , 2015.
Reference(s):
1. Harold Kerzne, “Project Management - Best Practices: Achieving Global Excellence”, Edition: 3,
Wiley Publications , 2013.
2. George Ritz, Sidney Levy, “Project Management in Construction”, Edition: 6, Mc. Graw Hill
Education , 2011.
3. Gary Heerkens, “, Project Management”, Edition: 2, Mc. Graw Hill , 2013.
HSS18R005 : STRESS MANAGEMENT AND COPING L T P C
STRATEGIES 3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
Stress has become an integral part of every professional’s life. Approaching the stress in the right
manner has become imperative as it has become an unavoidable one. The stress and its effect over
performance has also become notable in today’s organization. To cope well and to sustain in market,
for that the skills are required to understand and to overcome the same. This course helps in
understanding the intricacies of stress and overcoming the stress through appropriate approaches
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Understand the responsibility of tackling stress
Identify and modify the approaches of stress accordingly while dealing with team in
CO2
workplace
Illustrate the concepts to face high- pressure working conditions will be able to tackle
CO3
stress appropriately without ignoring
CO4 Interpret to implement a stress -free work environment
Illustrate the behaviour and personality and ensure professional working condition and
CO5
balanced quality of life

CO1 2 1 1 2 1 2
CO2 2 1 2 3 3 2
CO3 2 2 1 1 2
CO4 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO5 1 1 1 3 1 1 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I: UNDERSTANDING STRESS
Meaning - Symptoms: Biological and Behavioural - Work Related Stress - Individual Stress – Reducing Stress –
Burnout
Unit-II: COMMON STRESS FACTORS TIME

Common Sources of Stress Biological, Personality and Environmental – Time Management – Techniques –
Importance of planning the day – Time management schedule – Developing concentration – Organizing the Work
Area - Prioritizing – Beginning at the start – Techniques for conquering procrastination – Sensible delegation –
Taking the right breaks – Learning to say ‘No’
Unit-III: CRISIS MANAGEMENT

Implications – People issues – Structure issues, environmental issues, psychological fall outs – Learning to keep
calm – Preventing interruptions – Controlling crisis – Importance of good communication – Taking advantage of
crisis – Pushing new ideas – Empowerment
Unit-IV: WORK PLACE HUMOUR

Developing a sense of Humour – Learning to laugh, role of group cohesion and team spirit, using humour at
work, reducing conflicts with humour. Coping Styles Defensive Behaviours and Problem-Solving
Unit-V: SELF DEVELOPMENT

Improving Personality – Leading with Integrity, enhancing creativity – Effective Decision Making – Sensible
Communication – The Listening Game – Managing Self - Meditation for Peace – Yoga for Life
Text Book(s):
1. D. Gordano and G. Everly, “Controlling Stress and Tension”, Edition: 9, Prentice-Hall , 2013.
2. S. Greenberg Jerrold, “Comprehensive Stress Management”, Edition: 14, McGraw Hill Education ,
2017.
Reference(s):
1. Dr. P.K.Dutta, “Stress Management”, Edition: 1, Himalaya Publishing House , 2010.
2. Schafer, “Stress Management”, Edition: 4, Cengage Learning , , Delhi, 2008.
3. Wolfgang Linden, “Stress Management”, Edition: 1, Sage Publication , 2005.
L T P C
HSS18R006 : ECONOMICS FOR ENGINEERS
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
This course introduces a broad range of economic concepts, theories and analytical techniques. It
considers both microeconomics - the analysis of choices made by individual decision-making units
(households and firms) - and macroeconomics - the analysis of the economy. Demand and market
structure will be analysed at the firm level. Macroeconomic issues regarding National Income, Inflation,
labour and money at an aggregate level will be modelled. The role of government policy to address
microeconomic market failures and macroeconomic objectives will be examined
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Identify and learn economic concepts into market economies
Understand the pricing methods, interpret the market factors to determine the price for
CO2
products or services and to making decisions based on demand factors.
Understand the major characteristics of different market structures and the implications for
CO3
the behaviour of the firm.
CO4 Measure living standards, inflation, and unemployment for use as economic indicators.
CO5 Understand the role of international trade involved in commercial and central banks

CO1 3
CO2 1 1 2
CO3 1 1 2 1 1
CO4 3 3 1 2
CO5 1 1 1 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I: DEFINITION AND SCOPE OF ECONOMICS
Meaning - Symptoms: Biological and Behavioural - Work Related Stress - Individual Stress – Reducing Stress
Definitions by A. Smith, A. Marshal and L. Robbins, P.Samuels on and their critical examination - Nature and
scope of Economics - Micro-economics in relation to other branches of Economics
Unit-II: PRICING AND LAW OF DEMAND

Demand, Factors influencing demand, Elasticity of demand - price, income and cross, concepts and measurement
- Break Even Analysis – Law of Demand - Price, income and substitution effects - Giffen goods- Pricing Methods
Unit-III: MARKET STRUCTURE

Definition of market. Concepts of product and factor markets. Different types of market: perfect competition,
monopoly, imperfect competition, monopolistic, competition and oligopoly. Demand and Supply schedules. Price
determination under perfect competition in long and short run. Price determination under monopoly.
Discriminating monopoly
Unit-IV: : MACRO ECONOMICS
Meaning, Macro-economic Policy and Its Objectives and Instruments - National Income and Social Accounting
- Concepts, components, and measurement - Basic circular flow of income model, Unemployment, trade cycle,
Inflation - causes, types, effects and control
Unit-V: COMMERCIAL AND CENTRAL BANKS

Credit creation, monetary policy and tools - Balance of payments - Items in the balance of payments account,
equilibrium in the balance of payments
Text Book(s):
1. S. B. Gupta, “Monetary Economics”, Edition: 2, S. Chand & Co , New Delhi, 2009.
2. Ruddar Datt and K.P.M. Sundharam, “Indian Economy”, Edition: 7, S. Chand & Company Ltd., New
Delhi , 2006.
Reference(s):
1. D.N. Dewedi, “Managerial Economics”, Edition: 8, S. Chand & Company Ltd , New Delhi, 2005.
2. G. S. Gupta, “Macroeconomics, Theory and Applications”, Edition: 2, Tata McGraw-Hill publishing
company Ltd. , ., New Delhi, 2004.
3. William H. Branson, “3. Macroeconomic –Theory and policy”, Edition: 3, Tata McGraw-Hill
publishing company Ltd , New Delhi, 2010..
HSS18R007 : HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT AND L T P C
LABOUR LAW 3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
This course aims at exploring key issues related to the management, performance, and development of
human resources in the workplace. It places special emphasis on making decisions and developing plans
that will enable managers to make the best possible use of their human resources, and covers areas such
as: manpower planning, analysis and evaluation, recruitment and selection, wages and salaries, training
and management development, performance appraisal, and industrial relations
Course Outcome(s):
Illustrate the basic knowledge on developing the employment relations and knowledge to
CO1
resolve the issues
Interpret an appropriate and suitable role of HR specialist for implementing Human Resource
CO2
Management policies
CO3 Illustrate the manpower to motivate and attract them to retain in the organization.
Understand the responsibility of employer and legal system to manage the employment
CO4
relations
Understand the applicability of business law on various functional domains this in turn
CO5
enhances a strong human relation

CO1 2 1 1 2 2
CO2 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 3
CO4 1 1 1
CO5 2 1 1 1 3 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I: FUNDAMENTALS OF HRM
Human Resource Development Systems-HR environment in India-Functions and Operations of a Personnel Office
- Emerging HR Trends - HR information system
Unit-II: : HRM FUNCTIONS

Job analysis and job design - HR planning – Recruitment - selection and induction- Staff Training and
Development-Career planning and Development- Job Evaluation-Performance Appraisal and Potential
Evaluation-Wage determination; salary structure-Wage policies and Regulations-Employee benefits and services
Unit-III: MOTIVATING HUMAN RESOURCES

Team and Team work - Collective Bargaining Employee Morale – Participative Management – Quality Circle –
Empowerment –counselling and mentoring
Unit-IV: MAINTENANCE OF WORKERS
Compensation Management- Reward system – Labour relations –Employee Welfare, Safety and Health –
Employee benefits and services – Promotion, Transfers and separation – Ethical issues in HR Management and
International Human Resource Management - Legal Aspect of Labour
Unit-V: BUSINESS LAW

Factories Act, 1948 - Industrial Dispute Act, 1947 – Industrial employment – Standing Orders Act, 1946 – Trade
Union Act, 1926 - Workmen Compensation Act, 1923, Employees State Insurance Act, 1948, Employees
Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provision Act, 1952, Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972. Payment of Wages Act
1936, Minimum wages Act, 1948– Payment of Bonus Act, 1965.Tamil Nadu Shops and Establishments Act.
Text Book(s):
1. Decenzo and Robbins, “Human Resource Management”, Edition: 12, Wiley , 2015.
2. L.M. Prasad, “Human Resource Management”, Edition: 3, Sultan Chand , 2018.
Reference(s):
1. Biswajeet Pattanayak, “Human Resource Management”, Edition: 3, Eastern Economy Edition , New
Delhi, 2010.
2. C.B. Gupta, “Human Resource Management”, Edition: 13, Sultan Chand , 2015.
3. Frank B. Cross and Roger LeRoy Miller, “The Legal Environment of Business Text and cases”,
Edition: 9, Cengage Learning , 2015.
L T P C
HSS18R008 : ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
This course focuses on the entrepreneurial process and the different kinds of entrepreneurial outcomes.
Topics covered include opportunity identification through analysis of industry niches, skills needed to
turn an opportunity into reality, business plans, launch decisions, and obtaining risk capital. This course
deals with the problems and challenges facing the management of businesses in raising funds, marketing
products and services, improving effectiveness and flexibility, and achieving growth.
Course Outcome(s):
Illustrate the concept of entrepreneurship and which in turn leads to think creatively for new
CO1
business opportunities to sustain individual as well as social goals.
Understand and promotes entrepreneurial spirit and provides a framework of successful
CO2
business world with relation to agencies to promote employment opportunities
Interpret on women entrepreneurship and promotes a successful business models and
CO3
explains operational implementations for investment details
Understand the role of government in promoting the entrepreneurship among the individuals
CO4
and organizations
Understand emerging concepts of marketing in the emerging global markets and provide
CO5
more insights into project management and venture promotion

CO1 1 3 1 1 1 1
CO2 1 1 1
CO3 2 2
CO4 2 1 1 1
CO5 2 3 1 3 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I: BASICS
Concepts of entrepreneur, entrepreneurship and entrepreneur - Characteristics and competencies of a successful
entrepreneur - General functions of an entrepreneur - Type of entrepreneurs - Role of entrepreneur in economic
development - Distinction between an entrepreneur and a manager - Entrepreneur and Intrapreneur
Unit-II: GROWTH OF ENTREPRENEURSHIP

Emergence of entrepreneurship - Economic and non-economic factors for stimulating entrepreneurship
development - Obstacles to entrepreneurship development in India - Growth of entrepreneurship in India.
Unit-III: WOMEN AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP

Concept of women entrepreneurship - Reasons for growth of woman entrepreneurship - Problems faced by them
and remedial measures
Unit-IV: ROLE OF THE GOVERNMENT IN ENTREPRENEURSHIP

DEVELOPMENT
Concept and meaning of entrepreneurship development - Need for entrepreneurship development programmes
(EDPs) - Objectives of EDPs - Organizations for EDPs in India; NIESBUD, SISI – their roles and activities.
Unit-V: VENTURE PROMOTION AND PROJECT FORMULATION

Concept of projects classification of projects and project report - Project identification and selection - Constraints
in project identification - Techniques of Project Identification, Significance – contents - formulation of project
report - Need for Project Formulation - Elements of project Formulation
Text Book(s):
1. Michael H Morris, “Corporate Entrepreneurship and Innovation in Corporations”, Edition: 7,
CENGAGE Learning , Delhi, 2010.
2. Jerry Katz, “Entrepreneurship Small Business”, Edition: 5, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company
Ltd., , 2007.
Reference(s):
1. Khanka S.S, “Entrepreneurial Development”, Edition: 1, S. Chand and Company Limited , New
Delhi, 2013.
2. Prasama Chandra, “Projects: Planning, Analysis, Selection, Implementation and Reviews”, Edition: 2,
Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited , New Delhi, 1996.
3. Robert D. Hisrich, “Entrepreneurship”, Edition: 10, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited ,
New Delhi, 2017. .
L T P C
HSS18R009 : COST ANALYSIS AND CONTROL
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
This course in meant to exhibit the concepts on costing by describing its elements, types and cost sheet
preparation. It also encompasses the analytical framework that can be applied in cost analysis like
Marginal costing, CVP analysis, break even analysis, etc. enabling the students to make decisions on
cost parameters. Students are enabled to apply techniques like standard costing, activity based costing,
etc. to manage and control cost effectively
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Understand the basics of Costing and preparation of Cost sheet.
CO2 Analyse the cost by applying tools like Marginal costing, CVP analysis and other applications
CO3 Understand the use of Budgets for controlling cost in Manufacturing or Production Centres
Illustrate the cost standards and critically examining the application of Standard costing in
CO4
a Production Centre
Understand the application of various strategic cost alternatives including Activity based
CO5
costing

CO1 3 1
CO2 3 1
CO3 1 1 2 1
CO4 1 2
CO5 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I: BASICS OF COSTING
Costing, Elements of costing, Types of cost, Preparation of cost sheet
Unit-II: COST ANALYSIS

Marginal costing, Cost - volume – Profit analysis, Break-Even- Analysis, Break –Even - Chart, Applications
Unit-III: CONTROL TECHNIQUES

Budgeting and Budgetary control, Types of Budgets, Preparation of purchase Budget, Flexible budgets, Cash
Budget, Sales Budget, Materials Budget, Master Budget, zero based Budgeting
Unit-IV: STANDARD COSTING

Types of Standards, Setting up of standards, Advantages and Criticism of Standard Costing –Control through
variances
Unit-V: ACTIVITY BASED COSTING

Transfer Pricing, Target costing, Life Style Costing, Activity Based Costing (only theory)
Text Book(s):
1. K.Saxena, C.D. Vashist, “Advanced Cost Accounting and Cost Systems”, Edition: 2, V.Sultan Chand
& Sons Publishers , 2014.
2. S.P. Jain & K. L. Narang, “Advances Cost Accounting”, Edition: 1, Kalyani Publishers , 2017.
Reference(s):
1. J. Blocher, K. H. Chen, G. Cokins and T. W. Lin, “Cost Management: A Strategic Emphasis”, Edition:
3, Irwin/McGraw-Hill , 2008.
2. Don R. Hansen, Maryanne M. Mowen, “Cornerstones of Cost Management”, Edition: 6, Cengage
Learning , 2015.
3. Roger Hussey, Audra Ong, “Strategic Cost Analysis”, Edition: 2, , Business Expert Press , 2012.
L T P C
HSS18R010 : PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT
text. text. text. text.
Pre-requisite: Nil
This course aims to clarify the principles and basic concepts of Product Design and Development.
Including organizations and understanding of its products. It also aims at enhancing the quality of
products. Product Design means recognition of a new product need, information gathering and
requirements setting up, unambitious-clear and complete specification list, study on the product's
mechanical architecture, selection of materials and production processes and engineering the various
components necessary to make the product work.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Understand the basic concepts related to design and development of New product
Understand the structured approach towards incorporating quality, safety, and reliability
CO2
into design
Illustrate the concepts relating to simulating product performance and manufacturing
CO3
processes
CO4 Understand the technologies related to computer aided group technology
CO5 Interpret implications of changes related to Economic analysis

CO1 2 1 1 2 1
CO2 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 1
CO3 2 2 2 1 2 1
CO4 2 1 1 1 2 2
CO5 2 1 2 1 1 1 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I: NEW PRODUCT IDEA
Definition – Design by Evolution and by Innovation - factors to be considered for product design – Production-
Consumption cycle – The morphology of design – Primary design Phases and flowcharting. Role of Allowance,
Process Capability, and Tolerance in Detailed Design and Assembly Product strategies, Market research –
identifying customer needs – Analysis of product – locating ideas for new products, Selecting the right product,
creative thinking, curiosity, imagination and brain storming - product specification
Unit-II: NEW PRODUCT DESIGN

Task - Structured approaches – clarification – search – external and internal – systematic exploration – conception,
selection - methodology benefits. The value of appearance - principles and laws of appearance – incorporating
quality, safety, and reliability into design. Man-machine considerations – Designing for ease of maintenance.
Unit-III: ROLE OF TECHNOLOGY IN DESIGNING

Integrating CAE, CAD, CAM tools – Simulating product performance and manufacturing process – Needs for
industrial design-impact – Industrial design process – Technology driven products - user driven products –
assessing the quality of the product
Unit-IV: METHODS AND PRINCIPLES OF DESIGNING

Methodologies and tools - Design axioms - Design for assembly and evaluation - Minimum part assessment -
Taguchi Method - Robustness assessment - Manufacturing process rules - Designer’s tool kit - Computer aided
group process rules - Designer’s tool kit - Computer aided group technology - Failure Mode Effective Analysis –
Design for minimum number of parts – Development of modular design – Minimising part variations – Design of
parts to be multifunctional, multi-use, ease of fabrication – Pooka Yoka principles.
Unit-V: FEASIBILITY ANALYSIS

Estimation of manufacturing cost – cost procedures – Value Engineering - reducing the component cost and
assembly cost – minimizing the system complexity – Basics and Principals of prototyping – Economic Analysis:
Break even analysis. Classes of exclusive rights – Patents – Combination versus aggregation – Novelty and Utility
– Design patents – Paten disclosure – Patent application steps - Patent Office prosecution - Sales of patent rights
- Trademarks – copy rights.
Text Book(s):
1. Karl. T. Ulrich, D. Steven, “Product Design and Development”, Edition: 6, McGraw Hill International
, 2016.
2. A.K.Chitale, R.C.Gupta, “Product Design and Manufacturing”, Edition: 3, Prentice Hall of India
Private Limited , New Delhi, 2005.
Reference(s):
1. Richard Crowson, “Product Design and Factory Development”, Edition: 2, CRC Press , 2005.
2. Thomke, Stefan, Ashok Nimgade, “IDEO Product Development”, Edition: 2, Boston, MA: Harvard
Business School Case , 2000.
3. George E.Dieter, Linda C.Schmidt, “Engineering Design”, Edition: 4, McGraw-Hill Higher Education
, 2012.
L T P C
HSS18R011 : BUSINESS PROCESS REENGINEERING
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
This course focuses on both quantitative and qualitative analytical skills and models essential to
operations process design, management, and improvement in both service and manufacturing oriented
companies. The main objective of the course is to prepare the student to play a significant role in the
management of a world class company which serves satisfied customers through empowered
employees, leading to increased revenues and decreased costs.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Understand the basic concepts related to Business Process Reengineering
CO2 Understand the methodologies and tools used for Business Process Reengineering
Illustrate the concepts relating to benefit/cost analysis and its impact on the business
CO3
organizations
Understand the need for assessment of business re-engineering and the factors contributing
CO4
to its success
Interpret the best practices used in Business Process Reengineering with illustrations from
CO5
corporate world

CO1 1 1 2 1
CO2 1 1 3 1
CO3 1 1 1 1 2 1
CO4 1 1 1 1
CO5 2 3
Course Topics:
Unit-I: BASIC CONCEPTS
Introduction to BPR Definition; the paradigm shifts in production; the positioning concept; the re-engineering
visions; the benefits of business re-engineering
Unit-II: METHODOLOGIES FOR BPR

Methodologies and Tools for BPR, Process management; dynamic business re-engineering change framework;
steps to reengineer the process.
Unit-III: MODELLING THE BUSINESS

Methodologies and Tools for BPR, Process management; dynamic business re-engineering change framework;
steps to reengineer the process
Unit-IV: :CHANGE MANAGEMENT

Change Management, Planned changes in business re-engineering projects; challenges of business change;
business change development. Success factors in re-engineering. The assessment of business re-engineering.
Unit-V: BEST PRACTICES IN BPR

Best Practices in BPR, Case studies: Bell Atlantic, Nissan, Chrysler, Xerox, and Hewlett Packard etc.
Text Book(s):
1. Ali K. Kamrani, Maryam Azimi, “New Methods in Product Design: New Strategies in Reengineering
(Engineering and Management Innovation)”, Edition: 2, CRC Press , 2013.
2. Bassam Hussein, “PRISM: Process Reengineering Integrated Spiral Model.”, Edition: 2, VDM Verlag
Dr. Mueller e.K , 2008.
Reference(s):
1. P. Harmon, “Business Process Change: A Guide for Business Managers and BPM and Six Sigma
Professionals”, Edition: 2, Elsevier/Morgan Kaufmann Publishers , 2007.
2. R. Anupindi, “Managing Business Process Flows: Principles of Operations Management”, Edition: 1,
Pearson , 2006.
3. R. Srinivasan, “Business process Reengineering”, Edition: 1, Mcgraw hill Publication , 2017.
L T P C
HSS18R012 : POLITICAL ECONOMY
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
This course introduces the political economy of India. It examines the interplay of politics and
economics. Some of the key themes to be explored are globalization, economic reform, poverty,
redistribution, federalism, political protest, public goods delivery, gender, and ethnic politics. Although
this class focuses specifically on India, many the themes discussed in this course are functions of
institutions, rights, Party Systems and challenges.
Course Outcome(s):
Explain the key concepts of political economy analyse the significant developments in the
CO1
political ideologies.
Describe the salient features of the constitution of India and its functions and interpret,
CO2
integrate and critically analyse the fundamental rights duties and responsibilities.
CO3 Understand the Political party system their evolution and role in the economy
CO4 Understand the various ideological of Indian Political Thoughts
CO5 Understand and appreciatiate India’s undergoing major economic and social transformation

CO1 1 3 1
CO2 1 2 1 1 1
CO3 1
CO4 1 1
CO5 1 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I: BASICS OF POLITICAL ECONOMY
Political Economy as a Method, perspectives, Politics as Reproduction of Social Relations, State and Social
Opportunity, Politics of Rent Seeking -Evolution of State in India: Historical Roots of planning, Redistribution
Unit-II: INDIAN CONSTITUTION

The Pre-amble- Fundamental rights and duties, Directive Principles- Offices of the President, Prime Minister,
Cabinet Government, Chief Election Commissioner, and Governor – Parliamentary system and Procedures - The
Judiciary system.
Unit-III: PARTY SYSTEM

National and regional political parties, ideological and social bases of parties; patterns of coalition politics;
Pressure groups, trends in electoral behaviour; changing socio- economic profile of Legislators
Unit-IV: INDIAN POLITICAL THOUGHT

Political Ideologies: Liberalism, Socialism, Marxism, Fascism, Gandhism and Feminism - Dharamshastra,
Arthashastra and Buddhist traditions; Sir Syed Ahmed Khan, Sri Aurobindo, M.K. Gandhi, B.R. Ambedkar, M.N.
Roy
Unit-V: CHALLENGES TO INDIAN DEMOCRACY

Uneven Development of Regions in India – Communalism – Regionalism – Violence – Corruption –

environmental degradation- illiteracy –population
Text Book(s):
1. Charles Sackrey, Geoffrey Schneider, Janet Knoedler,, “Introduction to Political Economy”, Edition: 8,
Dollars & Sense , 2016.
2. Robert.S.Dimand, “Review of Political Economy: An Introductory Text”, Edition: 1, Routledge , 2008.
Reference(s):
1. Barry R. weingast and Donald A.Wittman, “Handbook of Political Economy”, Edition: 1, Oxford
University Press , , New York, 2006.
2. Ed. Sanjay Ruparelia; Sanjay Reddy; John Harriss & Stuart Corbridge, “Understanding India’s New
Political Economy: A Great Transformation”, Edition: 1, Routledge , 2011.
3. M.Laxmikanth, “Indian Polity”, Edition: 4, McGraw Hill Education , New Delhi,2017. .
L T P C
HSS18R013 : PROFESSIONAL ETHICS
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
This subject will provide students with ability to understand and analyse managerial problems in
industry so that they can use resources (capitals, materials, staffing, and machines) more effectively.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Identify the multiple ethical interests at stake in a real-world situation or practice
CO2 Assess their own ethical values and the social context of problems
Develop critical thinking skills and professional judgement and understand practical
CO3
difficulties of bringing about change
Demonstrate knowledge of ethical values in non-classroom activities, such as service
CO4
learning, internships, and field work
Manage differing opinions on complex ethical scenarios. It's important for those confronted
CO5 with ethical challenges to be able to hold multiple conflicting points of view, without
necessarily adhering to any of them

CO1 1 3 1 1
CO2 3 1 3 1 1
CO3 1 2 1
CO4 2 2 2 2 1
CO5 2 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I: ENGINEERING ETHICS
Functions of Being a Manager – Stock holder and stakeholder management – Ethical treatment of employees -
ethical treatment of customers- supply chain management and other issues
Unit-II: ENGINEERING AS SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION

Senses of Ethics – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral dilemmas – Moral Autonomy – Kohlberg’s
theory – Gilligan’s theory – Consensus and Controversy – Professions and Professionalism – Professional ideals
and virtues – Theories about right action – Self-interest – Customs and religion – Use of Ethical Theories.
Unit-III: ENGINEER RESPONSIBILITY FOR SAFETY

Corporate social responsibility - Collegiality and loyalty – Respect for Authority – Collective Bargaining –
Confidentiality – Conflicts of Interest – Occupational Crime – Professional Rights – Employee Rights –
Discrimination.
Unit-IV: RESPONSIBILITY AND RIGHTS

Moral imagination, stake holder theory and systems thinking - One approach to management decision – making
Leadership.
Unit-V: GLOBAL ISSUES

Multinational Corporations – Environmental Ethics – Computer Ethics – WeaponsDevelopment – Engineers as
Managers – Consulting Engineers – Engineers as ExpertWitnesses and Advisors – Moral Leadership – Sample
code of conduct
Text Book(s):
1. Mike Martin and Roland Schinzinger, “Introduction to Engineering Ethics”, Edition: 2, McGraw Hill ,
2010.
2. Charles D Fledderman, “Engineering Ethics”, Edition: 2, Pearson , 2011.
Reference(s):
1. R.S.Nagarajan, “Text book on Professional Ethics and Human Values”, Edition: 1, New Age
International , 2007.
2. Gail Baura, “Engineering Ethics- An Industrial Perspective”, Edition: 1, Academic Press , 2006.
3. Charles E. Harris, Michael S. Pritchard and Michael J. Rabins Texas, “Engineering Ethics- Conecpts
and Cases”, Edition: 4, Cengage Learning , 2009.
L T P C
HSS18R014 : OPERATIONS RESEARCH
3 0 0 3
Course Category: Humanities and Social Science
Pre-requisite: Nil
It is essential for professionals in any field to understand the ethical problems and principles in their
field. The general principles of professional ethics will be examined, as well as the distinctive problems.
This course is presented in three parts: theory; case studies; and research and presentation. Theory
includes ethics and philosophy of engineering.
Course Outcome(s):
Identify and develop operational research models from the verbal description of the real
CO1
System
CO2 Build and solve Transportation Models and Assignment Models
CO3 Identify the basic concepts in the linear program theory and game theory
Illustrate the results and propose recommendations in language understandable to the
CO4
decision-making processes in Management Engineering
Design new simple models, like: CPM, MSPT to improve decision –making and develop
CO5
critical thinking and objective analysis of decision problems

CO1 2 1 1 1 2
CO2 2 1 2 1 2
CO3 2 1 1 1 2
CO4 2 1 1 1 2
CO5 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I: LINEAR PROGRAMMING BASICS
Introduction to applications of operations research in functional areas of management - Linear Programming -
formulation, solution by graphical and simplex methods (Primal - Penalty, Two Phase), Special cases - Dual
simplex method
Unit-II: TRANSPORTATION MODELS AND ASSIGNMENT MODELS

Transportation Models (Minimising and Maximising Cases) – Balanced and unbalanced cases – Initial Basic
feasible solution by N-W Corner Rule, Least cost and Vogel’s approximation methods - Check for optimality -
Solution by MODI / Stepping Stone method - Cases of degeneracy - Transhipment Models - Assignment Models
(Minimising and Maximising Cases) – Balanced and Unbalanced Cases - Solution by Hungarian and Branch and
Bound Algorithms - Travelling Salesman problem - Crew Assignment Models.
Unit-III: INTEGER LINEAR PROGRAMMING AND GAME THEORY

Solution to pure and mixed integer programming problem by Branch and Bound and cutting plane algorithms -
Game Theory - Two Person Zero sum games - Saddle point, Dominance Rule, graphical and LP solutions.
Unit-IV: REPLACEMENT MODELS AND DECISION THEORY

Replacement Models-Individuals Replacement Models (With and without time value of money) – Group
Replacement Models - Decision making under risk – Decision trees – Decision making under uncertainty.
Unit-V: PROJECT MANAGEMENT METHOD AND SIMULATION

PERT / CPM – Drawing the network, computation of processing time, floats and critical path. Resource levelling
techniques - Application of simulation techniques for decision making
Text Book(s):
1. S. Kalavathy, “Operations Research”, Edition: 4, Vikas Publishing House , 2013.
2. R. Paneerselvam, “Operations Research”, Edition: 2, Prentice Hall of India , 2009.
Reference(s):
1. D.S.Hira, “Problems in Operations Research”, Edition: Kindle, S.Chand , 2010.
2. Prem Kumar Gupta and D.S. Hira, “Operations Research”, Edition: 2, S.Chand , 2016.
3. R.C.Mishra, “Principles of Operations Research”, Edition: 1, New Age International , 2011.
L T P C
HSS18R015 : TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
This subject provides students with the knowledge to understand the philosophy and core values of
Total Quality Management (TQM). It helps to determine the voice of the customer and the impact of
quality on economic performance and long-term business success of an organization; apply and evaluate
best practices for the attainment of total quality. Students who complete this course will be able to
critically appraise management techniques, choose appropriate statistical techniques for improving
processes and write reports to management describing processes and recommending ways to improve
them.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Understand the role and nature of quality in evolving international economic conditions
CO2 Apply the Principles of Quality Management for real time problems.
Interpret the quality encounter process, including supporting facilities and customer
CO3
requirements/characteristics
CO4 Classify quality measurement methods and continuous improvement process
Frame Management strategy methods, including identification, development, implementation
CO5
and feedback processes

CO1 1 2
CO2 2 1 1
CO3 1 1 1
CO4 1
CO5 1 2 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I: INTRODUCTION TO QUALITY MANAGEMENT
Definitions – TOM framework, benefits, awareness and obstacles - Quality – vision, mission and policy statements
- Customer Focus – customer perception of quality, Translating needs into requirements, customer retention.
Dimensions of product and service quality. Cost of quality
Unit-II: PRINCIPLES AND PHILOSOPHIES OF QUALITY MANAGEMENT

Overview of the contributions of Deming, Juran Crosby, Masaaki Imai, Feigenbaum, Ishikawa, Taguchi, Shingeo
and Walter Shewhart - Concepts of Quality circle, Japanese 5S principles and 8D methodology.
Unit-III: STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL AND PROCESS CAPABILITY

Meaning and significance of statistical process control (SPC) – construction of control charts for variables and
attributed - Process capability – meaning, significance and measurement – Six sigma concepts of process
capability - Reliability concepts – definitions, reliability in series and parallel, product life characteristics curve -
Business process re-engineering (BPR) – principles, applications, reengineering process, benefits and limitations.
Unit-IV: TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES FOR QUALITY MANAGEMENT

Quality functions development (QFD) – Benefits, Voice of customer, information organization, House of quality
(HOQ), building a HOQ, QFD process. Failure mode effect analysis (FMEA) – requirements of reliability, failure
rate, FMEA stages, design, process and documentation.
Unit-V: TAGUCHI TECHNIQUES

Taguchi techniques – introduction, loss function, parameter and tolerance design, signal to noise ratio - Seven
old (statistical) tools - Seven new management tools - Bench marking and POKA YOKE
Text Book(s):
1. Poornima M.Charantimath, “Total quality management”, Edition: 2, Pearson Education, , 2011.
2. Dale H.Besterfield, “Total Quality Management”, Edition: 3, Pearson Education , 2004.
Reference(s):
1. K. Shridhara Bhat, “Total Quality Management – Text and Cases”, Edition: 1, Himalaya Publishing
House , 2002.
2. Jams R. Evans, “Total Quality: Management, Organisation and strategy”, Edition: 4, South- Western
College , 2004.
3. Vincent K.Omachonu, Joel E.Ross, “Principles of Total Quality”, Edition: 3, CRC Press , 2004.
L T P C
HSS18R016 : ADVANCED SOFT SKILLS
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: Nil
This course provides the students with the knowledge in problem solving skills in addition with the
logical thinking and reasoning. This would enhance the effective communication and it also enhance
the verbal ability and data interpretation techniques which is very much needed to survive and enter in
to the industries.
Course Outcome(s):
Explain the basic concepts in effective communication with the enhanced knowledge in
CO1
vocabulary
CO2 Identify and solve the problems related to the quantitative ability.
CO3 Apply the basic problems involved in the non-verbal reasoning
CO4 Illustrate the basic knowledge in verbal questions with proper comprehensive studies
CO5 Identify the problems related to data interpretation

CO1 2 2
CO2 2 2
CO3 2 2
CO4 2 2
CO5 1 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I: EFFECTIVE COMMUNICATION
Comprehending Ability, Business Vocabulary, Speed Reading, Non-Verbal Communication, Cross Cultural
Communication, Meeting Management, Technology trend awareness
Unit-II: QUANTITATIVE ABILITY

Time & Work, Time-Speed-Distance, Permutation & Combination Probability, Geometry & Mensuration,
Number Properties, Ratio & Proportion, Mixtures & Alligation, Percentages, Profit-Loss-Discount, Averages,
Progression, Higher Mathematics
Unit-III: LOGICAL ABILITY

Non-Verbal Reasoning, Deductive & Inductive Reasoning, Binary Logic, Number Series, Clocks, Calendars
Unit-IV: VERBAL ABILITY

Reading Comprehension, Parajumbles, Critical Reasoning, Subject-Verb Agreement, Synonyms & Antonyms,
Grammar Reading Comprehension & Logic Miscellaneous Verbal questions
Unit-V: DATA INTERPRETATION

Line Charts, Bar Charts, Pie Charts, Venn diagrams, Caselets, Data tables
Text Book(s):
1. R.S. Agarwal, “Quantitative Aptitude”, Edition: 3, S Chand Publishing , 2017.
2. R. V. Praveen, “Quantitative Aptitude and Reasoning ”, Edition: 2, PHI Learning Private Limited , 2013.
Reference(s):
1. Dinesh Khattar, “Quantitative Aptitude for Competitive Examination”, Edition: 1, Pearson Education ,
2008.
2. Sarvesh K Kumar, “Quantum CAT”, Edition: 1, Arihant Publication , 2016.
3. R. S. Agarwal, “A modern Approach to Verbal and Non-verbal reasoning”, Edition: 3, S. Chand
Publication , 2018.
L T P C
MEC18R310 : CNC MACHINING
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: MEC18R375-Metal Course Category: Major Elective
This course introduces you to modern manufacturing with two areas of emphasis: computer aided
manufacturing, and computer aided process planning.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Apply the concepts of manufacturing science in the field of advanced manufacturing systems
CO2 Analyze the complex engineering linkage, machine and structure of the CNC
CO3 Compare the different types of drive systems used in CNC for mechanical engineering field
CO4 Identify the effect of different types of co-ordinate system used in CNC machining
CO5 Demonstrate the different types of cutting tools and materials

CO1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
CO4 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 3
CO5 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
Course Topics:
Development of CNC technology - principles, features, advantages, economic benefits, applications - CNC, DNC
concept - classification of CNC machine- types of control, CNC controllers, characteristics, interpolators- current
trends in programming, Human Machine Interface software
Unit-II: CNC MACHINES

CNC machine building, structural details, configuration and design, guide ways - friction and antifriction and
other types of guide ways - elements used to convert the rotary motion to a linear motion- screw and nut - re-
circulating ball screw, planetary roller screw, re- circulating roller screw - rack and pinion - torque transmission
elements- gears, timing belts, flexible - couplings and bearings. ATC and Tool Magazines, and Machine Control
Units - maintenance of CNC machines.
Unit-III: DRIVES
Spindle drives- DC shunt motor, 3 phase AC induction motor - feed drives - stepper motor servo principle, DC
and AC servo motors- open loop and closed loop control - axis measuring system - synchro, synchro revolver,
gratings, moiré fringe gratings, encoders, inductosyn laser interferometer.
Unit-IV: PART PROGRAMMING

Coordinate system - structure of a part program, G and M codes - manual part programming for Fanuc, Sinumeric
control system – CAPP - APT part programming using CAD/CAM, parametric programming. Introduction to
Computer assisted part programming -Step turning and thread cutting operations.
Unit-V: CUTTING TOOL MATERIALS

Cutting tool materials - carbide inserts classification - qualified, semi qualified and preset tooling, tooling system
for machining centre and turning centre work holding devices –ISO tool holders and inserts.
Text Book(s):
1. P.Radhakrishnan, , “Computer Numerical Control Machines”, Edition: 1, New Age publishers , 2018.
2. A.T.Sadasivan, D. Sarathy , “Cutting tools for Productive Machining”, Edition: 1 Widia (India) Ltd
, 2005.
Reference(s):
1. James Madison, “CNC Machining Hand book”, Edition: 1, Industrial Press inc , 1996.
2. P.C. Pandey, H.S. Shan, “Modern machining processes”, Edition: 1, Tata McGraw-Hill , 1980.
MEC18R322 : MEC18R322 MODERN L T P C

MANUFACTURING PROCESSES 3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite: MEC18R375- Metal Course Category: Major Elective
The aim of undergoing this course is to develop the basic Ideas with the Metallurgical Composition,
Machining and Robotics.
Course Outcome(s):
Recognize the need and importance of Non-traditional process and its selection based on
CO1
the parameters, shapes
Distinguish theprinciple, process parameters of abrasive water jet machining and
CO2
ultrasonic machining process.
CO3 Describe the process involved in the electrical discharge machining
Analyze chemical and electro chemical machining process for making complex profile in
CO4
hard metals.
CO5 Outline the appropriate high energy machining process for the various materials

CO1 2 1 1 1 3 2
CO2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 3 2 1
CO3 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 3 2 1
CO4 3 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 1
CO5 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 2 1
Course Topics:
Need of Non-Traditional Machining Processes – Classification Based on Energy, Mechanism, source of energy,
transfer media and process – Process selection Based on Physical Parameters, shapes to be machined, process
capability and economics – Overview of all processes.
Unit-II: MECHANICAL PROCESS

Ultrasonic Machining: Principle- Transducer types – Concentrators – Abrasive Slurry – Process Parameters –
Tool Feed Mechanism – Advantages and Limitations – Applications. Abrasive Jet Machining: Process- Principle
– Process Variables – Material Removal Rate – Advantages and Limitations – Applications. Water Jet Machining:
Principle – Process Variables – Advantages and Limitations – Practical Applications – Abrasive water jet
machining process.
Unit-III: ELECTRICAL DISCHARGE MACHINING

Electrical Discharge Machining: Mechanism of metal removal – Dielectric Fluid – Flushing methods – Electrode
Materials – Spark Erosion Generators – Electrode Feed System – Material Removal Rate – Process Parameters –
Tool Electrode Design – Tool wear Characteristics of Spark Eroded Surfaces- Advantages and Limitations –
Practical Applications. Electrical Discharge Wire Cut and Grinding: Principle – Wire Feed System – Advantages
and Limitations – Practical applications
Unit-IV: CHEMICAL AND ELECTRO CHEMICAL MACHINING

Chemical Machining: fundamentals, Principle –classification and selection of Etchant -chemical milling,
Engraving, Blanking – Advantages and limitations – Applications. Electro Chemical Machining: Electro-
chemistry of the process-Electrolytes – Electrolyte and their Properties – Material Removal Rate – Tool Material
– Tool Feed System – Design For Electrolyte Flow – Process Variables – Advantages and Limitations –
Applications – Electro Chemical Grinding: Honing, cutting off, Deburring and turning.
Unit-V: HIGH ENERGY MACHINING PROCESS

Electron Beam Machining: Principle –Generation and control of electron beam-Advantages and Limitations –
Applications. Laser Beam Machining: Principle –Solid and Gas Laser Application – Thermal Features of LBM –
Advantages and Limitations – Applications. Ion Beam Machining: Equipment – process characteristics –
Advantages and Limitations – Applications. Plasma Arc Machining: Principle –Gas mixture– Types of Torches
– Process Parameters – Advantages and Limitations – Applications. Ion Beam Machining – Principle – MRR –
advantages, limitation, applications.
Text Book(s):
1. P.C Pandey And H.S. Shan, “Modern Machining Process”, Edition: 1, Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing
Company Limited, New Delhi , 2017.
2. V.K. Jain, “Advanced Machining Process”, Edition: 1, Allied Publishers Pvt Limited , 2009.
Reference(s):
1. Amithaba Bhattacharyya, “New Technology”, Edition: 1, The Institution of Engineers, India , 2009.
2. Hmt, Hmt, H M T Bangalore, “Production Technology”, Edition: 1, Tata McGraw-Hill Education
, 2017.
3. Hassan El – Hofy, “Advanced machining Processes”, Edition: 1, MC Graw-Hill , 2005.
MEC18R338 : GEAR MANUFACTURING AND L T P C

INSPECTION 3 0 0 3
This course provides the candidates with a broad understanding of the methods used to manufacture
and inspect gears and how the resultant information can be applied and interpreted in the design process.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Review a range of terminologies and principles of Gear Geometry.
CO2 Make use of different gear manufacturing techniques pertaining to the application.
CO3 Identify appropriate gear inspection techniques in relevance with the application.
CO4 Examine the various stages of materials processing, designing and analyzing of gears.
CO5 Build bevel and worm gears according to the design standards for a relevant claim.

CO1 2 1 2 1 2 3
CO2 1 3 1 1 2 1 1 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 1 1 1 3 3 3
CO5 3 2 3 2 2 3 1 3 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I: GEAR GEOMETRY
Principles of gear tooth action, geometry of spur and helical gears. Gear terminologies
Unit-II: GEAR MANUFACTURING

Gear manufacturing – types – forming gear teeth by milling – gear generation by planning, shaping and hopping
process – applications.
Unit-III: GEAR INSPECTION

Parkinson gear testing, Gleason gear testing, sources of errors in manufacturing gears, gear measurements,
measurement of individual element, rolling test, composite method of gear checking.
Unit-IV: DESIGN AND ANALYSIS

Design considerations, materials treatments and methodology - gear tooth failure mode analysis, stresses and load
calculation.
Unit-V: BEVEL AND WORM GEARS

Principles of geometry and design of bevel and worm gearing.
Text Book(s):
1. R.L. Norton, “Design of Machine Elements”, Edition: 1st, Tata McGraw-Hill Education , 2005.
2. Hmt, Hmt, H M T Bangalore, “Production Technology”, Edition: 1st, Tata McGraw-Hill Education
, 2017.
Reference(s):
1. G. L. Maitra, “Hand Book of Gear Design”, Edition: 2nd, Tata McGraw-Hill , 2008.
2. R. K. Jain, “Engineering Metrology”, Edition: 1979, Khanna Publishers, Delhi , 2009.
3. P.S.G. Tech, “Design Data”, Edition: 3rd, Kalaikathir Publishers , 2012.
MEC18R412 : MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL L T P C

SYSTEMS 3 1 0 4
Pre-requisite: EEE17R172- Basic Course Category: Major Elective
Electrical Engineering Course Type : Theory
The objective of this course is to make students to gain the knowledge in MEMS (Micro electro Mech
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Understand the basic concept of MEMS and their technology.
CO2 Understand (Ilustrate) the material properties and identify the fabrication process.
CO3 Apply the knowledge to design the Micro and Nano devices for various applications.
CO4 Apply the knowledge to design the components by analyzing various techniques.
CO5 Understand (Interpret) the concept of transducer design and their fabrication techniques

CO1 2 3 1 2
CO2 2 1 1 2 1
CO3 2 2 1 2
CO4 2 2 1 2
CO5 2 1 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I: FUNDAMENTALS OF MEMS
Introduction, history, development and need of micro-electro - mechanical systems, Components of MEMS-
overview of MEMS technology.
Unit-II: MATERIALS AND FABRICATION PROCESSES

Different electro-physical processes used for machining - dealing with MEMS materials - relevant non -
conventional processes - IC fabrication processes used for MEMS - MEMS sensors and actuators.
Unit-III: NANO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEM

Introduction to Design of NEMS biological and bio systems analogies - Devising and Synthesis of MEMS AND
NEMS - MEMS Motion Micro devices Classifier – Synthesis Nano electromechanical Systems Modeling of
Micro- and Nano-scale Electromechanical Systems – Devices, Structures and its Applications
Unit-IV: DESIGN CONSIDERATION

Design consideration – process design-mechanical design –design of silicon die-design of micro fluidic network
systems-capillary electrophoresis network system
Unit-V: MEMS AND NEMS

Design and Fabrication Analysis of Translational Micro-transducers - Single-Phase Reluctance, Micro-motors -
Modeling, Analysis, and Control - Three-Phase Synchronous Reluctance Micro-motors Micro-fabrication
Magnetization, Dynamics of Thin Films Microstructures – Micro-transducers With Permanent Magnets.
Text Book(s):
1. Tai Ran Hsu, “MEMS and MICRO SYSTEMS Design and Manufacture”, Edition: 1, McGraw Hill
Education , 2017.
2. Vijay K Varadan, “Micro Sensors, MEMS, and Smart Devices”, Edition: 1, John Wiley and sons
, 2001.
Reference(s):
1. MarcMadou, “Fundamentals of micro Fabrication”, Edition: 3, CRC Press , 2011.
2. Vijay K. Varadan, K. J. Vinoy, K. A. Jose, “RF MEMS and Their Applications”, Edition: 1, John
Wiley & Sons , 2003.
3. Stephen Beeby, “MEMS Mechanical Sensors”, Edition: 1, Artech House , 2004.
MEC18R429 : PRODUCT DESIGN AND L T P C

DEVELOPMENT 3 1 0 4
Pre-requisite: MEC18R303- Design of Course Category: Major Elective
Machine Elements Course Type : Theory
The aim of undergoing this course is to develop basic understanding the topics in Mechanical
Engineering
Course Outcome(s):
Analyze the need and importance of product design and development processes in
CO1
manufacturing industries.
CO2 Apply the methodologies for concept generation, selection and testing of product design.
CO3 Design product architecture and its role in product development.
CO4 Develop the process design using CAD, CAM and CAE tools.
CO5 Interpret the benefit analysis through various cost models.

CO1 2 1 1 2
CO2 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO3 2 1 2 2 1 1 3 1
CO4 3 2 3
2 1 2 3 1 2
CO5 2 1 2 1 1 2
Course Topics:
Need for IPPD – Strategic importance of Product development – integration of customer, designer, material
supplier and process planner, Competitor and customer – behaviour analysis. Understanding customer –
promoting customer understanding – involving customer in development and managing requirement –
Organization process management and improvement
Unit-II: CONCEPT GENERATION, SELECTION AND TESTING

Plan and establish product specifications. Task – Structural approaches – clarification – search – externally and
internally – Explore systematically – reflect on the solutions and processes – concept selection – methodology –
benefits. Implementation – Product change – variety – component standardization – product performance –
manufacturability – Concept Testing Methodologies.
Unit-III: PRODUCT ARCHITECTURE

Product development management – establishing the architecture – creation – clustering – geometric layout
development – fundamental and incidental interactions – related system level design issues – secondary systems
– architecture of the chunks – creating detailed interface specifications – portfolio architecture
Unit-IV: INDUSTRIAL DESIGN

Integrated process design – Managing costs – Robust design – Integrating CAE, CAD, CAM tools – Simulating
product performance and manufacturing processes electronically – Need for industrial design – impact – design
process – investigation of customer needs – conceptualization – refinement – management of the industrial design
process – technology driven product s – user – driven products – assessing the quality of industrial design.
Unit-V: DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURING AND PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT

Definition - Estimation of Manufacturing cost – reducing the component costs and assembly costs – Minimize
system complexity – Prototype basics - Principles of prototyping – Planning for prototypes – Economic Analysis
– Understanding and representing tasks – baselines project planning – accelerating the project – project execution.
Text Book(s):
1. Karl T. Ulrich, Steven D. Eppinger, “Product design and development”, Edition: 5, McGraw-
Hill/Irwin , 2012.
2. George E.Dieter, Linda C.Schmidt, “Engineering Design”, Edition: 4, McGraw-Hill International
, 2009.
Reference(s):
1. Karl Ulrich, Steven Eppinger , “Product Design and Development”, Edition: 6, McGraw-Hill
Education , 2015.
2. Anita Goyal, Karl T Ulrich, Steven D Eppinger, “Product Design and Development”, Edition: 4, Tata
McGraw-Hill Education , 2009.
3. Ali Jamnia, “Introduction to Product Design and Development for Engineers”, Edition: 1, CRC Press
, 2018.
L T P C
MEC18R307:DESIGN OF TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS
3 0 0 3
To understand the principles involved in evaluating the shape and dimensions of a component to
satisfy functional and strength requirements.
Course Outcome(s):
Analyze, understand and design flexible transmission elements such as belt, chain and wire
CO1
ropes.
Interpret and design spur gear drive for different application and analyze the same for
CO2
various applications.
Apply design procedure for making helical, bevel and worm gear drives for various
CO3
applications.
CO4 Develop a new set of gear box for different applications.
CO5 Demonstrate and select suitable materials for clutches and brakes.

CO1 3 2 3 2 2 2 3 1
CO2 3 1 3 2 3 2 3 1
CO3 3 1 3 2 3 2 3 1
CO4 3 1 3 2 3 2 3 1
CO5 3 1 3 2 3 2 3 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I:DESIGN OF FLEXIBLE ELEMENTS
V belts and pulleys - flat belts and pulleys - wire ropes and pulleys - link chains and pulleys – transmission
chains and sprockets - silent chains - ribbed V belts.
Unit-II:DESIGN OF SPUR GEAR

Gear terminology – module – force analysis- tooth stresses – fatigue strength – Lewis and Buckingham design –
limitations – dynamic effects
Unit-III:DESIGN OF BEVEL, WORM AND HELICAL GEARS

Parallel helical gears - kinematics - force analysis in crossed helical gears - worm gearing - force analysis in
straight bevel gears - kinematics bevel gear - force analysis in gear blank - Cross Helical gears.
Unit-IV:DESIGN OF GEAR BOX

Gear box-geometric progression, standard step ratio, Ray diagram, kinematics layout -design of sliding mesh
gear box - constant mesh gear box. Couplings, Torque Converters for automotive applications.
Unit-V:DESIGN OF CLUTCHES AND BRAKES
Clutches –internal expanding rim clutches- external contracting rim clutches - frictional contact axial clutches,
cone clutches – brake- energy considerations - temperature rise - friction materials.
Text Book(s):
1. Shigley, J.E., and Mischke, C.R, “Mechanical Engineering Design”, Edition:8 ,McGraw-Hill
International,2008.
2. Bhandari V.B, “Design of Machine Elements”, Edition:4,McGraw Hill Education India Private
Limited,2017.
Reference(s):
1. Maitra, G.M., Prasad, L.V “Hand book of Mechanical Design”, Edition:2 Tata McGraw-Hill, ,1985.
2. Shigley, J.E., and Mischke, C.R, “Mechanical Engineering Design”, Edition:2,McGraw-Hill International
Editions,1989.
3. Norton, R.L, “Design of Machinery”, Edition:3,McGraw-Hill Book Co Ltd,2003.
L T P C
MEC18R317:TRIBOLOGY
3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite:NIL
Course Type :Theory
The aim of undergoing this course is to provide broad based understanding of the interdisciplinary
subject ‘tribology’ and its technological significance
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Explain the surface friction and types of wear at different conditions
Outline the theories of lubrication, lubrication regimes, theories of hydrodynamic, elasto
CO2
hydrodynamic etc.
CO3 Identify suitable wear testing equipment and standard procedure for different applications.
CO4 Apply suitable frictional components to reduce frictional wear.
CO5 Evaluate the various tribological instruments with international standards.

CO1 3 2 2 1 2 1
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 2
CO5 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I:SURFACE FRICTION AND WEAR
Topography of the surfaces - surface features - surface interaction - theory of friction - sliding and rolling
friction, friction properties of metallic and non-metallic materials, friction in extreme conditions - wear- types of
wear - mechanism of wear - wear resistance materials - surface treatment - surface modifications - surface
coatings. .
Unit-II:LUBRICATION THEORY
Lubricants-physical properties, lubricants standards, lubrication regimes - hydrodynamic lubrication - Reynolds
equation - thermal, inertia and turbulent effects - elasto hydrodynamic, plasto hydrodynamic and magneto
hydrodynamic lubrication - hydro static lubrication - gas lubrication.
Unit-III:WEAR TESTING METHOD

An abrasive wear tester-A rolling sliding wear tester- A pin-on-disc wear tester-Three body wear test.
Unit-IV:APPLICATION OF TRIBOLOGY
Introduction-Rolling Contact Bearings- Gears- Journal Bearings – Off shore bearing, wind turbine sliding
bearing.
Unit-V:TRIBO MEASUREMENT IN INSTRUMENTATION

Surface Topography measurements – Electron microscope and friction and wear measurements – Laser method
– instrumentation - International standards – bearings performance measurements – bearing vibration
measurement
Text Book(s):
1. 1. Sahoo, “Engineering Tribology”, Edition:1 ,Prentice Hall India Learning Private Limited,2005.
2. 1. Kenneth Holmberg Allan MatthewsBasu, S.K., Senguta, S.N, “Fundamentals of Tribology”,

Edition:1,Prentice Hall India Learning Private Limited,2005.
Reference(s):
1. Krishan Kant Sharma, “Tribology”, Edition:1 Laxmi Publications ,2016.
2. Stachowiak, “ENGINEERING TRIBOLOGY”, Edition:1,, Butterworth-Heineman UK2005.
3. 3. Basu, S.K, Sengupta,.Ahuja,B, “Fundamentals of Tribology”, Edition:1,Prentice –Hall of India Pvt
Ltd,2010.
MEC18R331:VIBRATION ANALYSIS AND NOISE L T P C

MONITORING 3 1 0 4
Pre-requisite:NIL
Course Type :Theory
The aim of undergoing this course is to develop knowledge on advanced technologies in vibration
analysis and noise monitoring.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Demonstrate vibration and summarize the types of mechanical vibrations.
CO2 Explain noise monitoring and apply techniques on noise controlling.
CO3 Classify the various sources of automotive noises.
CO4 Identify various control techniques of vibrations.
CO5 Construct various techniques for noise control.

CO1 3 2 2
CO2 2 3 3 2 2 2
CO3 1 3 1 2
CO4 1 3 3 2 2
CO5 1 3 3 2 2 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I:FUNDAMENTALS OF VIBRATION
Introduction - classification of vibration - free and forced vibration, undamped and damped vibration, linear and
non linear vibration - response of damped and undamped systems under harmonic force analysis of single
degree and two degree of freedom systems, torsional vibration, determination of natural frequencies.
Unit-II:BASICS OF NOISE
Introduction - amplitude, frequency, wavelength and sound pressure level, addition, subtraction and averaging
decibel levels, noise dose level, legislation -measurement and analysis of noise - measurement environment -
equipment, frequency analysis, tracking analysis, sound quality analysis source ranking, noise control
effectiveness.
Unit-III:AUTOMOTIVE NOISE SOURCES

Noise Characteristics of engines - engine overall noise levels, assessment of combustion noise, assessment of
mechanical noise, engine radiated noise, intake and exhaust noise, engine accessory contributed noise,
transmission noise, aerodynamic noise, tyre noise, brake noise
Unit-IV:CONTROL TECHNIQUES
Vibration isolation - tuned absorbers, untuned viscous dampers, damping treatments- application of dynamic
forces generated by IC engines - engine isolation - crank shaft damping - modal analysis of the mass elastic
model shock absorbers
Unit-V:SOURCE OF NOISE AND CONTROL

Methods for control of engine noise - combustion noise, mechanical noise, predictive analysis, palliative
treatments and enclosures - automotive noise control principles -sound in enclosures, sound energy absorption,
sound transmission through barriers. Case studies in automobile applications
Text Book(s):
1. Singiresu S.Rao, “Mechanical Vibrations”, Edition:6 ,Pearson Education,2017.
2. KewalPujara, “Vibrations and Noise for Engineers”, Edition:2,Dhanpat Rai and Sons Ltd,2018.
Reference(s):
1. Bernard Challen and RodicaBaranescu “Diesel Engine Reference Book”, Edition:2 SAE International
,1999.
2. Julian Happian-Smith, “An Introduction to Modern Vehicle Design”, Edition:1,Butterworth -
Heinemann2012.
3. John Fenton, “Handbook of Automotive body Construction and Design Analysis”, Edition:1,Wiley
India,2010.
L T P C
MEC18R426:DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF EXPERIMENTS
3 1 0 4
Pre-requisite:Nil
Course Type :Theory
• Obtain the knowledge about various types of experiments that are frequently employed in
industries for experimental studies.
• Plan, design and conduct experiments efficiently and effectively.
• Being prepared to analyze and interpret the experimental data obtained through designed
experiments.
• Being able to compare classical designs, orthogonal arrays and response surface methods.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Analyze the various types of designs of experiments.
CO2 Apply and selection of the proper design of experiments that suits the application.
CO3 Classify control factors, their levels, noise factors and objective functions.
CO4 Evaluate and learn adjustments and modifications in standard design of experiments.
CO5 Apply the regression model for the problem considered.

CO1 2 1 2
CO2 2 1 1 2
CO3 2 3 1 2
CO4 2 1 1 2 1
CO5 1 2 3 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I: INTRODUCTION TO RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
Introduction to research methodology, The economics of reducing variation, quality characteristics and
objective functions, Taguchi quality loss function, DOE process – steps and description, Typical test strategies,
Better test strategies- full factorial experiments, fractional factorial experiments, standard orthogonal arrays and
linear graphs
Unit-II:ANOVA
Construction of orthogonal arrays and modification of linear graphs. Introduction to analysis of variance
(ANOVA) – analogy with Fourier analysis, No way ANOVA, one way ANOVA, two way ANOVA, three way
ANOVA, signal to noise (S/N) ratio, sum of squares, degrees of freedom, F-test, p-value, pooling, percent
contribution, interpretation, examples on ANOVA.
Unit-III:DESIGN OF EXPERIEMENTS
Control factors and their levels and noise factors. Two level experiments (2K design), blocking and
confounding, three level experiments (3K design), mixed level experiments, multiple level experiments,
polynomial effects, confirmation experiments, additive models, Latin squares and related designs, case studies.
Unit-IV: ANALYSIS OF EXPERIEMENTS

Response surface methodology (RSM) – First order model, second order model, stationary point, central
composite design (CCD), Box-Behnken design, Face centered cubic design (FCCD), surface plots.
Unit-V:MODELLING
Fitting regression models, model building, adequacy checking of models and case studies.
Text Book(s):
1. D. C. Montgomery, “Design and analysis of experiment”, Edition:9,Wiley,2017.
2. R.Panneerselvam Design and Analysis of Experiments”, Edition:2,, Prentice Hall India Learning Private
Limited,2012.
Reference(s):
1. P.J. Ross, “Taguchi Techniques for quality engineering”, Edition:2 Tata Mc-Graw Hill ,2005.
2. Douglas C. Montgomery, “Design and Analysis of Experiments”, Edition:8,Wiley2013.
3. Kishore K. Pochampally , Surendra M. Gupta, “Six Sigma Case Studies with Minitab”, Edition:3,CRC
Press,2014.
MEC18R318:REFRIGERATION AND AIR L T P C

CONDITIONING 3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite:Thermal Engineering
Course Type :Theory
Enable the students to understand the principles and concepts of refrigeration and air conditioning
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Interpret the basic concepts of various refrigeration systems
Predict the types of refrigerants suitable for the applications considering the environmental
CO2
issues.
CO3 Employ the acquired knowledge to provide solution for the psychrometric properties.
CO4 Identify the cooling load for a given space and suggest the cooling requirements.
CO5 Impart knowledge about the air conditioning equipment and its usage.

CO1 3 1 1 2 2 2
CO2 3 1 1 1 3 2 2 1
CO3 3 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 1
CO5 3 1 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I:INTRODUCTION
Review of thermodynamic principles of refrigeration, concept of aircraft refrigeration system, Advanced vapour
compression refrigeration cycle and system, use of P-H charts, multistage and multiple Evaporator systems,
cascade system, COP comparison, Advanced vapour absorption refrigeration system & components, ammonia
water and lithium bromide water systems, steam jet refrigeration system.
Unit-II:REFRIGERANTS AND APPLICATIONS

Refrigerants - properties - selection of refrigerants, alternate refrigerants, refrigeration plant Controls testing and
charging of refrigeration units- applications to refrigeration systems. Ozone depletion and global warming issues
Unit-III:PSYCHROMETRY AND COOLING LOAD CALCULATION

(PSYCHROMETRIC AND COMFORT AIR CONDITIONING PROCESS)
Psychrometric processes-use of psychrometric charts, grand and room sensible heat factors, By pass factor,
requirements of comfort air conditioning, comfort charts, factors governing optimum effective temperature,
recommended design conditions and ventilation standards.
Unit-IV:LOAD
Types of load-design of space cooling load, heat transmission through building, solar radiation, Infiltration,
internal heat sources (sensible and latent) ,outside air and fresh air load, estimation of total load-domestic,
commercial and industrial systems-central air conditioning systems.
Unit-V:AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENTS

Air conditioning equipment – air cleaning and air filters, humidifiers ,dehumidifiers, air washers, Condenser,
expansion devices, evaporator, cooling tower and spray ponds, elementary treatment of duct design, air
distribution system-Thermal insulation of air conditioning systems–applications-car, industry, stores and public
buildings
Text Book(s):
1. Arora, Domkundwar, “A course in Refrigeration and Air conditioning”, Edition:1,Dhanpat Rai and CO. (P)
Ltd,2018.
2. Manohar Prasad, “Refrigeration and Air Conditioning”, Edition:3,New Age International,2018.
Reference(s):
1. C. P. Arora, “Refrigeration and AirConditioning”, Edition:3,TataMcGraw Hill,2014.
2. Roy.J. Dossat, “ Principles of Refrigeration”, Edition:4,Pearson Education,1985.
3. Jordon and Prister, “Refrigeration and Air Conditioning”, Edition:2,Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd,1985.
MEC18R333:DESIGN OF HEAT TRANSFER L T P C

EQUIPMENTS 3 1 0 4
Pre-requisite: Thermodynamics, Heat Course Category:Major Elective
and mass Transfer Course Type :Theory
Study about the fundamentals of heat exchanger mechanisms and design of heat exchangers as per the
industrial needs
Course Outcome(s):
Illustrate different types of heat exchangers and identify the varied methods of heat
CO1
exchanger analysis
CO2 Identify the resource parameters which affects the performance of heat exchangers
CO3 Manipulate the basic ideas in baffles with its effects and some varied heat exchangers
CO4 Employ the acquired knowledge in designing the condenser and evaporator
CO5 Interpret the concepts in selection of accessories for heat exchangers

CO1 3 2 2 2 1
CO2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 1 2 2
CO4 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I:HEAT EXCHANGERS
Types, shell and tube heat exchangers, regenerators and recuperators, industrial applications, temperature
distribution and its implications, LMTD, effectiveness
Unit-II:FRICTION FACTOR
Heat exchanger components design (tube- sheet, bonnet and channel, etc.) with ASME and TEMA codes, Effect
of turbulence, friction factor, pressure loss, channel divergence, thermal stress in tubes, and types of failures
Unit-III:HEAT TRANSFER AND PRESSURE LOSS

Heat transfer and pressure loss, flow configuration, effect of baffles, effect of deviations from ideality, design of
typical liquid, gas-liquid heat exchangers, plate heat exchangers
Unit-IV:CONDENSERS
Design of surface and evaporative condensers, design of shell and tube, plate type evaporators
Unit-V:ACCESSORIES
Material selection, packing’s, spray design, selection of pumps, fans and pipes, testing and maintenance,
experimental methods
Text Book(s):
1. D. Q. Kern, “Process Heat Transfer”, Edition:1,Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,2017.
2. SadikKakac, “Heat Exchangers: Selection, Rating, and Thermal Design”, Edition:3,CRC Press,2017.
Reference(s):
1. Kuppan Thulukalam, “Heat Exchanger Design Handbook”, Edition:2,CRC Press,2015.
2. Arthur P Frass, “Heat Exchanger Design”, Edition:2,John Wiley and Sons, New York,2015.
3. T. Taborek, “Heat Exchangers, Theory and Practice”, Edition:1,McGraw Hill Book Co,1980.
MEC18R342:COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS AND L T P C

HEAT TRANSFER 3 1 0 4
Pre-requisite:Thermal Engineering-
MEC18R274,Fluid Mechanics-
Course Type :Theory
MEC18R272
The course introduces the various methods to solve the complex problems in fluid flow and heat
transfer
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Apply the theory of Computational Fluid Dynamics for different types of fluid flow.
CO2 Apply finite difference methods in real time applications
CO3 Create algorithm for fluid flow problems using finite volume approach.
CO4 Solve one and two dimensional flow problems using finite element method.
CO5 Analyze the flow situations using CFD results

CO1 3 2 2 3 2 2 1 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 2
CO4 3 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 1 2 3 2 2 2
Course Topics:
Unit-I:INTRODUCTION
Physical phenomena governing differential equation, - conservation of mass, momentum and energy equation-
special form of Navier-Stokes equations –boundary layer theory- Buoyancy driven flow-compressible flow -
turbulent flow –classification of governing equations - initial and boundary conditions- grid independence test.
Unit-II:FINITE DIFFERENCE METHOD

Basics of finite difference method – finite difference approximations for derivatives – explicit and implicit
method – consistency, stability, numerical errors – upwind differencing-application of FDM to heat transfer
conduction and convection– SOLA method - mixed boundary condition - Gauss- Siedel and SOR Methods –
ADI method to solve ψ-ω form of NS equation-ADI method.
Unit-III:FINITE VOLUME METHOD

Control volume approach - steady and unsteady one dimensional conduction - two dimensional problems –
FVM applied to advection diffusion equation - predictor – corrector step- pressure correction technique-
SIMPLE algorithm – upwind scheme - power law scheme-source term linearization-implementation of
boundary condition.
Unit-IV:FINITE ELEMENT METHOD

Finite element method an introduction – Basic concepts – Galerkin’s method - steady state diffusion – transient
diffusion - one dimensional and two dimensional regions – FEM to 1D problem – 2D problems – finite element
formulations-– validation of CFD results - benchmark problems –cavity flow - inflow outflow problems –open
domain problems-enclosure problems
Unit-V:GRID GENERATION AND POST PROCESSING

Physical domain – computational domain – algebraic method – differential equation methods – adaptive grids –
body fitted co-ordinates system – stream line contours – vector plots - Turbulent flow an introduction –
modeling of turbulent flow - Turbulent flow k-ε model.
Text Book(s):
1. K. Muralidhar, “Computational fluid flow and heat transfer”, Edition:2,Narosa publishing house,2014.
2. A. D.Anderson , “Computational fluid mechanics and heat transfer”, Edition:3,CRC Press,2012.
Reference(s):
1. V. H.Versteeg, “An Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics”, Edition:2,Pearson Education
Publishers,2008.
2. Suhas V.Patankar, “Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow”, Edition:1,CRC press,2017.
3. Jaluria and Torrance, “Computational Heat Transfer”, Edition:2,Taylor and Francis Group,2002.
MEC18R405:ENERGY CONSERVATION AND L T P C

MANAGEMENT 3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite:MEC18R202- Course Category:Major Elective
Thermodynamics Course Type :Theory
To understand the energy data from industries and carry out energy audit for energy savings
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Recognize the demand of Energy and Power
CO2 Improve the energy conservation by adopting Energy audit & Energy Economics
CO3 Impart the basic principles of Energy Efficiency in Industries.
CO4 Apply the Energy conservation methods in thermal power plant
CO5 Conserve the energy in electro mechanical equipments

CO1 3 3 2 2 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 3
CO3 3 3 2 3 2 3
CO4 3 3 2 3 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 2 3 2 2 3
Course Topics:
Unit-I:INTRODUCTION
Introduction to energy & power scenario of world, National Energy consumption data, environmental aspects
associated with energy utilization
Unit-II:ENERGY AUDIT AND ENERGY ECONOMICS

Energy Auditing- need, types, methodology and barriers, role of energy managers, instruments of energy
auditing. Energy Economics- discount period, payback period, internal rate of return, net present value; Life
Cycle costing- ESCO concept
Unit-III:ENERGY EFFICIENCY
Components of EB billing, HT and LT supply, transformers, cable sizing; Concept of capacitors, power factor
improvement, harmonics; Electric motors- motor efficiency computation, energy efficient motors; Illumination-
Lux, Lumens, types of lighting, efficacy, LED lighting and scope of energy conservation in lighting
Unit-IV:ENERGY CONSERVATION IN THERMAL POWER PLANT

Thermal systems, Boilers, Furnaces and Thermic Fluid heaters- efficiency computation and energy conservation
measures; Steam distribution and usage, steam traps, condensate recovery, flash stream utilization; Insulation &
Refractories.
Unit-V:ENERGY CONSERVATION IN ELECTRO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENTS

Energy conservation in major utilities; pumps, fans, blowers, compressed air systems, Refrigeration& Air
Conditioning systems, Cooling Towers, DG sets. Energy Economics- discount period, payback period, internal
rate of return, net present value; Life Cycle costing- ESCO concept
Text Book(s):
1. W. R. Murphy, “Energy Management”, Edition:1,Butterworths, London,2009.
2. Callaghn, “Design and Management for Energy Conservation”, Edition:1,Pergamon Press, Oxford,2004.
Reference(s):
1. David Merick and Richard Marshal, “Energy, present and future options”, Edition:1,John Wiley and
Sons,2009.
2. N. A. Chaigier, “Energy Consumption and Environment”, Edition:1,McGraw-Hill,2007.
3. D. A. Reay, “Industrial Energy Conservation”, Edition:2,Pergama on Press,2004.
MEC18R435 : DESIGN FOR CELLULAR L T P C

MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS 3 1 0 4
To provide detailed information about the group technology concept.
To provide depth knowledge on planning, design, implementation and control techniques of cellular
manufacturing systems.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Describes the process and characteristics of group technology.
CO2 Design of various approaches for cellular manufacturing system.
CO3 Demonstrate the implementation process of cellular manufacturing system.
CO4 Analyze the performance of group technology and cellular manufacturing process
CO5: Apply and analyze the concepts acquired to determine the economy of cellular
CO5
manufacturing process

CO1 2 3 2 2 1
CO2 1 3 2 1 1 3
CO3 1 1 3 1 2 1
CO4 1 1 2 1 2 2
CO5 1 2 2 3 2 1 3
Course Topics:
Introduction to Group Technology (GT), Limitation of traditional manufacturing systems, characteristics and
design of groups, benefits of GT and issues in GT.
Unit-II: CMS PLANNING AND DESIGN

Problem in GT/CMS – Design of CMS – Models, Traditional approaches and non-traditional approaches –
Genetic Algorithms, Simulated Annealing, Neutral networks.
Unit-III: IMPLEMENTATION OF GT/CMS

Inter and Intra cell layout, cost and non – cost based models, establishing a team approach, Managerial structure
and groups, batch sequencing and sizing, life cycle issues in GT/CMS.
Unit-IV: PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL

Measuring CMS performance – Parametric analysis – PBC in GT/CMS, cell loading, GT and MRP framework.
Unit-V: ECONOMICAL OF GT/CMS

Conventional Vs group use of computer models in GT/CMs, Human aspects of GT/CMS – cases.
Text Book(s):
1. R. G. Askin and A. J. Vakharia, “Planning and Operation, in The automated factory- Hand Book:
Technology and Management”, Edition: 1, Cleland.D.I. and Bidananda,B (Eds), TAB Books , 1991.
2. A. K. Kamarani, H. R. Parsaei and D. H. Lilees, “Planning, design and analysis of cellular
manufacturing systems”, Edition: 1, Elsevier , 2011.
Reference(s):
1. J. L. Burbidge, “Group Technology in Engineering Industry”, Edition: 1, Mechanical Engineering
publications , 1979.
2. S. A. Irani, Sanjay Subramanian and Y. S. Allam, “Introduction to Cellular Manufacturing Systems”,
Edition: 1, Wiley , 2007.
3. Nauna Singh and Divakar Rajamani, “Cellular Manufacturing Systems: Design, Planning and
Control”, Edition: 1, Springer , 1996.
L T P C
MEC18R437 : DESIGN FOR ERGONOMICS
3 1 0 4
Pre-requisite: Nil
The aim of this course is to inculcate the knowledge on time management and shop floor control.
Course Outcome(s):
CO1 Explain the production Improvement studies with work study Concepts.
CO2 Demonstrate the Methodology to solve the human factor analysis In Industries.
CO3 Illustrate the procedure to develop systematic approach for process control.
CO4 Analyze the rate of timing in production and to control on time management.
CO5 Compare the effort of human and machine on production processes.

CO1 1 2 2 1 1 1
CO2 1 1 3 1 1 1
CO3 1 2 1 1 1
CO4 1 2 1 1
CO5 1 2 2 1 2 1
Course Topics:
Unit-I: PRODUCTIVITY
Definition, reason for low productivity, methods to improve productivity, work-study and productivity
Unit-II: HUMAN FACTOR IN WORK- STUDY

Relationship of work-study man with management, supervisor & workers, qualities of a work-study man.
Unit-III: METHOD-STUDY
Definition, Objectives, step-by-step procedure, questioning techniques, chart and diagrams for recording data.
Like outline process charts, flow process charts, multiple activity charts, two handed process chart, string diagram,
travel chart, cycle graph, Chrono-cycle graph, therbligs, micro motion study and film analysis, Simo chart,
principles of motion economy. Development and installation of new method.
Unit-IV: WORK-MEASUREMENT
Definition, various techniques of work-measurement work-sampling, stopwatch time study & its procedure, Job
selection, Equipment and forms used for study, methods of rating, allowances and their types, standard time,
numerical problems, predetermined – time standards and standard data techniques. Incentive –Meaning,
objectives of an incentive plan, various types of incentive plans.
Unit-V: ERGONOMICS
Introduction, history of development, man-machine system and its components. Introduction to structure of the
body- features of the human body, stress and strain, and metabolism, measure of physiological functions-
workload and energy consumption, biomechanics, types of movements of body members, strength and endurance,
speed of movements. NIOSH lifting equation, Lifting Index, Maximum acceptable Weights and Forces, Distal
upper extremities risk factors, Strain Index, RULA,REBA. Applied anthropometry – types, use, principles in
application, design of work surfaces and seat design. Visual displays for static information, visual displays of
dynamic information, auditory, tactual and olfactory displays and controls. Assessments of occupational exposure
to noise, heat stress and dust. Effect of vibration/noise, temperature, illumination and dust on human and
performance.
Text Book(s):
1. R. M. Barners, “Motion & Time study: Design and Measurement of work”, Edition: 7, Wiley , 2009.
2. M. E. Mundel and L. David, “Motion & Time Study: Improving Productivity”, Edition: 7, Pearson
Education , 2000.
Reference(s):
1. B. W. Niebel, “Motion and Time Study”, Edition: 7, Richard D Irwin Inc , 2015.
2. R. S. Bridger, “Introduction to Ergonomics”, Edition: 3, CRC Press , 2009.
3. N. A. Stanton and Mark Young, “Guide to Methodology in Ergonomics: Design for Human Use”,
Edition: 1, CRC Press , 1999.

B.Tech Mech 2018R PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

B.Tech Mech 2018R PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

B.Tech Mech 2018R PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

B.

CURRICULUM and SYLLABUS-2018

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Kalasalingam Academy of Research and Education

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

PEO-1- DIVERSIFIED KNOWLEDGE

PEO-2: CONTEMPORARY ISSUES & SKILLS

PEO-3: PROFESSIONAL ATTITUDE

PEO-4: PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPEMENT

Program Outcomes (POs):

PO1 - Engineering Knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering

PO3 - Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems

PO10 - Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the

S.No Category Credits

I. Basic Sciences and Mathematics 25

Humanities and Social Science 3

II. Soft Skills 3

III. Basic Engineering 24

VII Mandatory courses -- ---

Total Credits 160

II. HUMANITIES AND SOCIAL SCIENCE

III. BASIC ENGINEERING

S.No Course Code Course

MEC18R202 Thermodynamics T CHY18R171 3 1 0 4

MEC18R271 Strength of Materials IC MEC18R211 3 0 2 4

MEC18R351 Finite Element Analysis TP MEC18R271 2 0 2 3

MEC18R302 Manufacturing Processes T MEC18R152 3 0 0 3

c. Main Project work

S. No Course Code Course Name CT Pre-requisite L T P C

3. MEC18R325 Welding Technology T MEC18R274 3 0 0 3

8. MEC18R340 Composite Materials T MEC18R208 3 1 0 4

Heat treatment and

List of Major Electives – Design Stream

2. MEC18R306 Computer Aided Design T MEC18R151 3 0 0 3

S. No Course Code Course Name CT Pre-requisite L T P C

2. MEC18R313 Turbo Machinery T MEC18R202 3 0 0 3

Gas dynamics and Jet

4. MEC18R401 Power plant engineering T MEC18R202 3 0 0 3

5. MEC18R402 Automobile Engineering T MEC18R202 3 0 0 3

List of Major Electives – Industrial Engineering Stream

Course Code Course Name CT Pre-requisite L T P C

1. MEC18R305 Microprocessors in automation T - 3 0 0 3

Process Planning and Cost

3. MEC18R324 Plant Layout and Material Handling T - 3 0 0 3

Foundry Mechanization and

5. MEC18R404 Principles of Management T - 3 0 0 3

6. MEC18R416 Industrial Safety T - 3 0 0 3

7. MEC18R417 Work Study T - 3 0 0 3

8. MEC18R419 Production Planning And Control T MEC18R375 3 0 0 3

9. MEC18R424 Industrial Automation and Robotics T MEC18R374 3 1 0 4

10. MEC18R430 Integrated Manufacturing Systems T MEC18R302 3 1 0 4

12. MEC18R330 Robotics and Robot Applications T - 3 0 0 3

13. MEC18R304 Mechatronic systems T - 3 0 0 3

14 MEC18R414 Sensors and transducers T EEE18R172 3 1 0 4

OPEN ELECTIVES OFFERED FROM THE DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Course Code Course Name L T P C

Course Code Course Name L T P C

HSS18R001 Management Concepts and Techniques 3 0 0 3

S. No Course Code Course Name CT Pre-requisite L T P C